advertisement
VES-1616F-3x Series
VDSL Switch
User’s Guide
Version 3.60
5/2007
Edition 2
www.zyxel.com
About This User's Guide
About This User's Guide
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for people who want to configure the Switch series VDSL switch using the web configurator or via commands. You should have at least a basic knowledge of
TCP/IP networking concepts and topology.
Related Documentation
• Web Configurator Online Help
Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information.
• Supporting Disk
Refer to the included CD for support documents.
• ZyXEL Web Site
Please refer to www.zyxel.com for additional support documentation and product certifications.
User Guide Feedback
Help us help you. Send all User Guide-related comments, questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address, or use e-mail instead. Thank you!
The Technical Writing Team,
ZyXEL Communications Corp.,
6 Innovation Road II,
Science-Based Industrial Park,
Hsinchu, 300, Taiwan.
E-mail: [email protected]
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
3
4
Document Conventions
Document Conventions
Warnings and Notes
These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User’s Guide.
1
Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.
"
Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.
Syntax Conventions
• The VES-1616F-34 or VES-1616F-35 may be referred to as the “Switch”, the “device”, the “system” or the “switch” in this User’s Guide.
• Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.
• A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example, [ENTER] means the “enter” or “return” key on your keyboard.
• “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters and then press the [ENTER] key.
“Select” or “choose” means for you to use one of the predefined choices.
• A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example,
Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen.
• Units of measurement may denote the “metric” value or the “scientific” value. For example, “k” for kilo may denote “1000” or “1024”, “M” for mega may denote “1000000” or “1048576” and so on.
• “e.g.,” is a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” means “that is” or “in other words”.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Document Conventions
Icons Used in Figures
Figures in this User’s Guide may use the following generic icons. The Switch icon is not an exact representation of your device.
Switch Computer Server
Notebook computer DSLAM Gateway
Central Office/ ISP Internet Hub/Switch
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
5
6
Safety Warnings
Safety Warnings
1
For your safety, be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions.
• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do NOT store things on the device.
• Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.
• Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in
North America or 230V AC in Europe). For DC models, use DC power supply input of -
48V DC to -60V DC, 1.5A Max no tolerance.
• Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord.
• Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
• If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the power outlet.
• The length of exposd(bared) power wire should not exceed 7mm.
• Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Wire Gauge Specifications:Ground Wire: 18 AWG or larger for Ground Wire or Power
Wire.
• Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord.
• Connect the POTS line and VDSL line test pin (TNV Circuit) according to CSA60950-1
2.1.3 Protection in restricted access locations section. 避免危險 , 此區域必需為專業人員
方可進入及操作
This product is recyclable. Dispose of it properly.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Safety Warnings
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
7
Safety Warnings
8
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
9
Table of Contents
10
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
11
Table of Contents
12
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
13
Table of Contents
Part IV: Routing Protocol .................................................................... 161
Part V: Management............................................................................. 167
14
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
15
Table of Contents
Part VI: Commands, Troubleshooting and Specifications ............... 207
16
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
17
Table of Contents
Part VII: Appendices and Index .......................................................... 283
18
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Contents Overview
Contents Overview
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
19
Contents Overview
20
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
List of Figures
List of Figures
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
21
List of Figures
22
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
List of Figures
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
23
List of Figures
24
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
List of Tables
List of Tables
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
25
List of Tables
Table 81 Command Summary: Configuration Mode ............................................................................ 223
26
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
List of Tables
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
27
List of Tables
28
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
P
ART
I
Introduction
Getting to Know Your Switch (31)
29
30
C H A P T E R 1
Getting to Know Your Switch
This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the switch.
1.1 Introduction
The VES-1616F-3x series switches are stand-alone layer-2 VDSL (Very High Speed Digital
Subscriber Line) over POTS/ISDN switches.
The series consist of the following models at the time of writing.
• VES-1616F-34 (VDSL1),
• VES-1616F-34 (VDSL2),
• VES-1616F-35 (VDSL1) and
• VES-1616F-35 (VDSL2).
Use the show hardware-version command to check whether your device is a VDSL1 switch (100100, or 10050) or VDSL2 switch (5030). See Chapter 32 on page 211 for more information.
VDSL2 is the second generation of the VDSL (which is currently denoted VDSL1) standard.
"
You can only upload the firmware of the same VDSL standard as your Switch model.
1.2 Applications
This section shows the main applications for the switch:
1.2.1 MTU Application
The following diagram depicts a typical application of the Switch (labeled B) with the VDSL modems (labeled A), in a large residential building, or multiple tenant unit (MTU), that leverages existing phone line wiring to provide Internet access to all tenants. Note that VDSL service can coexist with voice service on the same line. The Switch is connected to a backbone switch (labeled C) using an Ethernet cable or a fiber-optic cable. The fiber connection allows distances of up to several kilometers (depending on your transceivers). The Ethernet connection is a suitable link for distances up to 100 meters (328 feet).
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
31
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
Figure 1 MTU Application
1.2.2 Curbside Application
You could place the Switch outdoors (in a street cabinet for example) in residential areas that are too far away from the ISP (Internet Service Provider) to receive DSL services. Residents only need to be within range of the Switch (not the ISP) to receive high-speed VDSL Internet access, and have enough bandwidth for data, voice, and video services. In the following example, the Switch (labeled B) is placed a considerable distance from the ISP and connected to a backbone switch (labeled C).
Figure 2 Curbside Application
1.3 Ways to Manage the Switch
Use any of the following methods to manage the Switch.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the Switch using a
(supported) web browser. See Chapter 4 on page 45 .
• Command Line Interface. Line commands offer an alternative to the Web Configurator
and may be necessary to configure advanced features. See Chapter 32 on page 209 .
32
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
• FTP. Use File Transfer Protocol for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore.
See
• SNMP. The device can be monitored and/or managed by an SNMP manager. See
.
1.4 Good Habits for Managing the Switch
Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the Switch. You could simply restore your last configuration.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
33
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
34
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 2
Hardware Installation
This chapter shows you how to install the switch.
"
Do NOT block the ventilation holes. Leave space between devices when stacking.
For proper ventilation, allow at least 4 inches (10 cm) of clearance at the front and 3.4 inches (8 cm) at the back of the switch. This is especially important for enclosed rack installations.
2.1 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
This section lists the rack mounting requirements and precautions and describes the installation steps.
2.1.1 Rack-mounted Installation Requirements
• Two mounting brackets.
• Eight M3 flat head screws and a #2 Philips screwdriver.
• Four M5 flat head screws and a #2 Philips screwdriver.
"
Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit.
2.1.1.1 Precautions
• Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains.
• Make sure the position of the switch does not make the rack unstable or top-heavy. Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit.
35
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation
2.1.2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch
1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the switch, lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the switch.
Figure 3 Attaching the Mounting Brackets
2 Using a #2 Philips screwdriver, install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the switch.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the switch.
4 You may now mount the switch on a rack. Proceed to the next section.
2.1.3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
1 Position a mounting bracket (that is already attached to the switch) on one side of the rack, lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack.
Figure 4 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
36
2 Using a #2 Philips screwdriver, install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 3
Hardware Overview
This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections.
3.1 Front Panel Connection
The front panel contains switch LEDs and all the network ports and port connections.
Figure 5 Front Panel
The following table describes the port labels on the front panel.
Table 1 Front Panel
PORT DESCRIPTION
This Telco-50 port connects to the central office or a PBX.
POTS/ISDN
LINE (Optional)
VDSL LINE
17, 18
CONSOLE
MGMT
This Telco-50 port connects to the user (subscriber) VDSL equipment.
These Gigabit/mini-GBIC uplink ports allow you to connect to any other switches.
The console port is for local management.
This RJ-45 port is for local management.
3.1.1 VDSL and POTS Connections
Connect the lines from the user equipment (VDSL modem) to the VDSL LINE port and the lines from the central office switch or PBX (Private Branch Exchange) to the POTS/ISDN
LINE port. Make sure that the VDSL LINE Telco-50 cable and the POTS/ISDN LINE Telco-
50 cable are not shorted on the MDF (Main Distribution Frame).
The line from the user carries both the VDSL and the voice signals. For each line, the switch has a built-in splitter that separates the high frequency VDSL signal from the voice band signal and feeds the VDSL signal to the switch, while the voice band signal is diverted to the
POTS/ISDN LINE port.
Refer to Appendix on page 275 for Telco50 pin assignments.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
37
38
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
3.1.2 Gigabit Ethernet Ports
There are two pairs of Gigabit Ethernet/mini-GBIC ports. The mini-GBIC ports have priority over the Gigabit ports. This means that if a mini-GBIC port and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time, the Gigabit port will be disabled. The speed of the Gigabit
Ethernet/mini-GBIC ports can be 100Mbps or 1000Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex (at 100 Mbps) or full duplex. The ports are auto-negotiating and auto-crossover.
An auto-negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed (10/100/
1000Mpbs) and duplex mode (full duplex or half duplex) of the connected device.
An auto-crossover (auto-MDI/MDI-X) port automatically works with a straight-through or crossover Ethernet cable.
3.1.2.1 Default Ethernet Settings
The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the switch are:
• Speed: Auto
• Duplex: Auto
• Flow control: on
• Trunking: Disabled
3.1.3 Mini-GBIC Slots
These are slots for mini-GBIC (Gigabit Interface Converter) transceivers. A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver. The switch does not come with transceivers. You must use transceivers that comply with the Small Form-factor Pluggable
(SFP) Transceiver MultiSource Agreement (MSA). See the SFF committee’s INF-8074i specification Rev 1.0 for details.
The mini-GBIC ports have priority over the Gigabit ports. This means that if a mini-GBIC port and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time, the Gigabit port will be disabled.
You can change transceivers while the switch is operating. You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber-optic connectors.
• Type: SFP connection interface
• Connection speed: 1 Gigabit per second (Gbps)
"
To avoid possible eye injury, do NOT look into an operating fiber-optic module’s connectors.
3.1.3.1 Transceiver Installation
Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver (SFP module).
1 Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Figure 6 Transceiver Installation Example
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
2 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place.
3 The switch automatically detects the installed transceiver. Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly.
Figure 7 Installed Transceiver
3.1.3.2 Transceiver Removal
Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver (SFP module).
1 Open the transceiver’s latch (latch styles vary).
Figure 8 Opening the Transceiver’s Latch Example
2 Pull the transceiver out of the slot.
Figure 9 Transceiver Removal Example
3.1.4 Console Port
For local management, you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters:
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
39
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
• VT100 terminal emulation
• 9600 bps
• No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
• No flow control
Connect the male 9-pin end of the console cable to the console port of the switch. Connect the female end to a serial port (COM1, COM2 or other COM port) of your computer.
3.1.5 Power Connector
Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel.
"
Make sure that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans.
3.2 LEDs
The LEDs are located on the front panel. The following table describes the LEDs on the front panel.
Table 2 LEDs
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
PWR Green
SYS
ALM
VDSL
Green
Red
Green
On
Off
Blinking
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
The system is turned on.
The system is off.
The system is rebooting and performing self-diagnostic tests.
The system is on and functioning properly.
The power is off or the system is not ready or malfunctioning.
There is a hardware failure (abnormal temperature, voltage or fan speeds).
The system is functioning normally.
The link to a VDSL line is up and the system is transmitting or receiving to/from a VDSL link.
The link to a VDSL line is down.
Gigabit Ports
LNK/ACT Green On
Amber
Blinking
On
Blinking
Off
The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up if the amber LED is on at the same time.
The port is receiving or transmitting data at 10 Mbps
The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up if the green LED is on at the same time.
The port is receiving or transmitting data at 100 Mbps.
The link to an Ethernet network is down.
Mini-GBIC Slots
40
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
Table 2 LEDs (continued)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
LNK Green
ACT Green
On
Off
Blinking
Off
The port has a successful connection.
No Ethernet device is connected to this port.
The port is sending or receiving data.
The port is not sending or receiving data.
MGMT
Green
Amber
On
Blinking
On
Blinking
Off
The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
The port is receiving or transmitting data at 10 Mbps.
The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
The port is receiving or transmitting data at 100 Mbp.
The link to an Ethernet network is down.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
41
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
42
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
P
ART
II
Status and Basic
System Status and Port Statistics (53)
43
44
C H A P T E R 4
The Web Configurator
This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator.
4.1 Introduction
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy switch setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later or Netscape
Navigator 7.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
4.2 System Login
1 Start your web browser.
2 Type “http://” and the IP address of the switch (for example, the default for the management port is 192.168.0.1 and for the switch port is 192.168.1.1) in the Location or Address field. Press [ENTER].
3 The login screen appears. The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234. The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen.
Figure 10 Web Configurator: Login
45
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen.
4.3 The Status Screen
The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator.
The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen.
Figure 11 Web Configurator Home Screen (Status)
46
In the navigation panel, click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
Table 3 Navigation Panel Sub-links Overview
BASIC SETTING
ADVANCED
APPLICATION
ROUTING
PROTOCOL
MANAGEMENT
The following table lists the various web configurator screens within the sub-links
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
47
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
.
Table 4 Web Configurator Screen Sub-links Details
BASIC SETTING ADVANCED APPLICATION
ROUTING
APPLICATION MANAGEMENT
System Info
General Setup
Switch Setup
IP Setup
Port Setup
VDSL Profile Setup
VDSL Alarm Profile
Setup
VDSL PSD Profile
Setup
VLAN Status
VLAN Port Setting
Static VLAN
Static MAC Forwarding
Filtering
Spanning Tree Protocol
Status
Spanning Tree Protocol
Configuration
Bandwidth Control
Broadcast Storm Control
Mirroring
Link Aggregation Status
Link Aggregation
Configuration
Port Authentication
RADIUS
802.1x
Port Security
Queuing Method
Classifier
Policy Rule
VLAN Stacking
Multicast
IGMP Filtering Profile
Multicast Status
MVR
Group Configuration
DiffServ
DSCP Setting
Static Routing
DHCP Relay
Maintenance
Remote Device Upgrade
VDSL Chip Reset
Remote Device Reset
Firmware Upgrade
Restore Configuration
Backup Configuration
Load Factory Default
Reboot System
Access Control
SNMP
Logins
Service Access Control
Remote Management
Diagnostic
Syslog
Cluster Management
MAC Table
ARP Table
The following table describes the links in the navigation panel.
Table 5 Navigation Panel Links
LINK DESCRIPTION
Basic Settings
System Info
General Setup
Switch Setup
IP Setup
Port Setup
VDSL Profile
Setup
This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring information.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information about the switch.
This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global switch parameters such as VLAN type, MAC address learning, IGMP snooping, GARP and priority queues.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address, subnet mask (necessary for switch management) and DNS (domain name server).
This link takes you to screens where you can configure settings for individual switch ports.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure VDSL profiles.
48
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
Table 5 Navigation Panel Links (continued)
LINK DESCRIPTION
VDSL Alarm
Profile Setup
VDSL PSD
Profile Setup
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure VDSL alarm profiles to apply to the VDSL lines.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure VDSL PSD profiles to apply to the VDSL lines.
Advanced Application
VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port-based or 802.1Q
VLAN (depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup screen).
Static MAC
Forwarding
Filtering
Spanning Tree
Protocol
Bandwidth
Control
This link takes you to screens where you can configure static MAC addresses for a port. These static MAC addresses do not age out.
This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules.
This link takes you to screens where you can configure the STP/RSTP to prevent network loops.
This link takes you to screens where you can cap the maximum bandwidth allowed from specified source(s) to specified destination(s).
This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters. Broadcast Storm
Control
Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference
Link Aggregation This link takes you to a screen where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one logical, higher-bandwidth link.
Port
Authentication
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure RADIUS (Remote
Authentication Dial-In User Service), a protocol for user authentication that allows you to use an external server to validate an unlimited number of users.
Port Security This link takes you to a screen where you can activate MAC address learning and set the maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port.
Queuing Method This link takes you to a screen where you can configure SPQ or WFQ with associated queue weights for each port.
Classifier This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the switch to group packets based on the specified criteria.
Policy Rule
VLAN Stacking This link takes you to a screen where you can configure VLAN stacking.
Multicast This link takes you to screens where you can configure multicast functions (such as
IGMP) on the switch.
MVR
This link takes you to a screen where you can define actions on classified traffic flows.
DiffServ
This link takes you to screens where you can configure MVR (Multicast VLAN
Registration).
This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ, configure marking rules and set DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p mappings.
Routing Protocol
Static Routing
DHCP Relay
This link takes you to screens where you can configure static routes. A static route defines how the switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP/IP parameters manually.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the DHCP relay settings for the network on the switch.
Management
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
49
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
Table 5 Navigation Panel Links (continued)
LINK DESCRIPTION
Maintenance
Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure SNMP and remote management.
Diagnostic
Syslog
This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as reboot the system.
This link takes you to screens where you can view system logs and test port(s).
This link takes you to screens where you can enable syslog logging and configure syslog server settings.
Cluster
Management
MAC Table
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure clustering management and view its status.
This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses (and types) of devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs.
ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses – IP address resolution table.
4.3.1 Change Your Password
After you log in for the first time, it is recommended you change the default administrator password. Click Management > Access Control > Logins to display the next screen.
Figure 12 Change Administrator Login Password
4.4 Switch Lockout
You are locked out from managing the switch if another administrator is currently logged in.
You must wait until he/she has logged out before you can log in.
Any of the following could also lock you and others out from using in-band management
(managing through the data ports).
Moreover, you could lock yourself (and all others) out from the switch by:
1 Deleting the management VLAN (default is VLAN 1).
50
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
2 Deleting all port-based VLANs with the CPU port as a member. The “CPU port” is the management port of the switch.
3 Incorrectly configuring the access control settings. This could also lock you out from performing out-of-band management (managing through the console port or management port).
4 Disabling all ports.
5 Assigning minimum bandwidth to the CPU port. If you limit bandwidth to the CPU port, you may find that the switch performs sluggishly or not at all.
"
Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the switch.
4.5 Resetting the Switch
If you lock yourself (and others) out of the switch, you can try using out-of-band management.
If you still cannot correct the situation or forgot the password, you will need to reload the factory-default configuration file.
4.5.1 Reload the Configuration File
Uploading the factory-default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit, no parity, one stop bit and flow control set to none. The password will also be reset to “1234” and the IP address to 192.168.1.1.
To upload the configuration file, do the following:
1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software. See
Section 3.1.4 on page 39 for details.
2 Disconnect and reconnect the switch’s power to begin a session. When you reconnect the switch’s power, you will see the initial screen.
3 When you see the message “ Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds ...
” press any key to enter debug mode.
4 Type atlc after the “ Enter Debug Mode ” message.
5 Wait for the “ Starting XMODEM upload ” message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal.
6 After a configuration file upload, type atgo to restart the switch.
51
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
Figure 13 Resetting the Switch: Via the Console Port
Bootbase Version: V0.1 | 06/05/2006 18:30:17
RAM:Size = 32 Mbytes
DRAM POST: Testing: 32768K OK
DRAM Test SUCCESS !
FLASH: AMD 32M
ZyNOS Version: V3.60(AIH.0)C0 | 01/25/2007 11:33:20
Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds.
.....................
Enter Debug Mode sysname> atlc
Starting XMODEM upload (CRC mode)....
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
Total 393216 bytes received.
Erasing..
................................................................
OK sysname> atgo
The switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of “1234”.
4.6 Logging Out of the Web Configurator
Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator. You have to log in with your password again after you log out. This is recommended after you finish a management session both for security reasons and so as you don’t lock out other switch administrators.
Figure 14 Web Configurator: Logout Screen
4.7 Help
The web configurator’s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information.
Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen.
52
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 5
System Status and Port
Statistics
This chapter describes the system status (web configurator home page) and port details screens.
5.1 Overview
The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details.
5.2 Port Status Summary
To view the port statistics, click Status in all web configurator screens to display the Status screen as shown next.
Figure 15 Status
53
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 5 System Status and Port Statistics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 6 Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System up
Time
This field shows how long the system has been running since the last time it was started.
The following fields are related to the VDSL ports.
Port This identifies the VDSL port. Click a port number to display the VDSL Port Details screen.
PayLoad Rate This field displays the upstream and downstream payload rates.
State This field shows whether the port is connected (Showtime), not enabled (Idle) or is negotiating a connection (Training).
Tx KB/s
Rx KB/s
Up Time
This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port.
This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port.
This field shows the total amount of time in hours, minutes and seconds the port has been up.
Retrain Click Retrain to re-establish the line connection.
The following fields are related to the Ethernet ports.
Port
Link
This identifies the port. Click a port number to display the Port Details screen.
This field displays the speed (10M for 10Mbps, 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for
1000Mbps) and the duplex (F for full duplex or H for half duplex).
State
LACP
This field displays the STP state of the port. See the Spanning Tree Protocol chapter for details on STP port states.
This fields displays whether the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) has been enabled on the port.
TxPkts
RxPkts
Errors
Tx KB/s
This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port.
This field shows the number of received frames on this port.
This field shows the number of received errors on this port.
This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port.
Rx KB/s
Up Time
This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port.
This field shows the total amount of time in hours, minutes and seconds the port has been up.
Poll Interval(s) The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set
Interval.
Stop
Clear Counter
Click Stop to halt system statistics polling.
Select ALL in the Port field and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for all ports.
Otherwise, select a port from the Port drop-down list box and then click Clear
Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port.
5.2.1 VDSL Summary
To view VDSL statistics, click VDSL Summary in the Status screen.
54
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Figure 16 Status: VDSL Summary
Chapter 5 System Status and Port Statistics
5.2.2 VDSL Port Details
Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics.
Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the switch.
Figure 17 Status: VDSL Port Details
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
55
Chapter 5 System Status and Port Statistics
56
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 7 Status: VDSL Port Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Info
Number
Name
Link Type
State
Up Time
Remote LAN Link 1
.. 4
VDSL Status
Line Rate
This field displays the port number.
This field displays the descriptive name of a port.
This field displays the type of the port.
This field displays the status of the port (Training, Idle or Showtime).
This field shows the total amount of time the line has been up.
This field displays the status of the link to the remote CPE device.
This field displays the upstream/downstream transmission rate.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 5 System Status and Port Statistics
Table 7 Status: VDSL Port Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Payload Rate
SNR Margin
This field displays the upstream/downstream payload rate.
This field displays the upstream/downstream SNR margin.
Interleave Delay This field displays the upstream/downstream interleave delay.
Transmit Power This field displays the upstream/downstream transmission power of the line.
Attenuation
CRC Error
This field displays the upstream/downstream attenuation.
This field displays the number of CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) error packet.
RS Correct
RS Uncorrect
ES
SES
Tx Packet
Tx Packets
Multicast
Broadcast
This field displays the number of Reed-Solomon (RS) correct packets.
This field displays the number of Reed-Solomon (RS) uncorrect packets.
This displays port endpoint errored seconds (ESs).
This displays port endpoint severely errored seconds (SESs).
This field displays the number of packets transmitted.
This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted.
This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted.
This field shows the number of 802.3x Pause frames transmitted.
Pause
Rx Packet
Rx Packets
Multicast
Broadcast
Pause
Control
This field displays the number of packets received.
This field shows the number of good multicast packets received.
This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received.
This field shows the number of 802.3x Pause frames received.
This field shows the number of control received (including those with CRC error) but it does not include the 802.3x Pause frames.
Tx Collision
Single
Multiple
Excessive
Late
This field shows the number of packets with 1 collision detected.
This field shows the number of packets with 2 to 15 collisions detected.
This field shows the number of packets with in excess of 15 collisions detected.
A late collision is counted when a device detects a collision after it has sent the
512th bit of its frame. This field shows the number of times such a collision is detected.
Error Packet
Rx CRC
Length
Runt
This field shows the number of frames with CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check) error(s).
This field shows the number of frames with a length that was out of range.
This field shows the number of frames received that were too short (shorter than
64 octets), including the ones with CRC errors.
Distribution
64
65-127
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were 64 octets in length.
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were between 65 and 127 octets in length.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
57
Chapter 5 System Status and Port Statistics
Table 7 Status: VDSL Port Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
128-255
256-511
512-1023
1024-1518
Giant
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were between 128 and 255 octets in length.
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were between 256 and 511 octets in length.
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length.
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length.
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were longer than 1518 octets in length.
VDSL Performance
LOS
LOF
BMIN
BERR
Curr. 15 Min.
Time Elapsed
LOS (15Min)
LOF (15Min)
This field displays the number of Loss of Signal (LOS) failures.
This field displays the number of Loss of Framing (LOF) failures.
If the actual SNR falls below the minimum SNR, the DSL connection will be dropped and re-initialized.
This field displays how many times the connection has been dropped due to the average SNR’ falling below the specified minimum SNR.
This field displays how many times the connection has been dropped due to the
CRC errors’ being increasing for more than 30 consecutive seconds.
This field displays the total number of errors detected within the last 15-minute
(900 second) time segment. The counter resets to zero after the time segment elapses.
This field displays the number of Loss of Signal (LOS) failures within the last 15 minute (900 second) time segment. The counter resets to zero after the time segment elapses.
This field displays the number of Loss of Framing (LOF) failures within the last 15 minute (900 second) time segment. The counter resets to zero after the time segment elapses.
BMIN (15Min)
LOS (1Day)
This field displays how many times the connection has been dropped due to the average SNR’ falling below the specified minimum SNR within the last 15 minute
(900 second) time segment. The counter resets to zero after the time segment elapses.
BERR (15Min) This field displays how many times the connection has been dropped due to the
CRC errors’ being increasing for more than 30 consecutive seconds within the last 15 minute (900 second) time segment. The counter resets to zero after the time segment elapses.
Curr. 1 Day
Time Elapsed
This field displays the total number of errors detected within the last 1-day time segment. The counter resets to zero after the time segment elapses.
This field displays the number of Loss of Signal (LOS) failures within the last 1day time segment. The counter resets to zero after the time segment elapses.
LOF (1 Day)
BMIN (1 Day)
This field displays the number of Loss of Framing (LOF) failures within the last 1day period. The counter resets to zero after the time segment elapses.
This field displays how many times the connection has been dropped due to the average SNR’s falling below the specified minimum SNR within the last 1-day period. The counter resets to zero after the time segment elapses.
BERR (1 Day) This field displays how many times the connection has been dropped due to the
CRC errors being increasing for more than 30 consecutive seconds within the last 1-day period. The counter resets to zero after the time segment elapses.
58
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 5 System Status and Port Statistics
Table 7 Status: VDSL Port Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Poll Interval(s)
Stop
The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval.
Click Stop to stop port statistic polling.
5.2.3 Ethernet Port Details
Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display the Ethernet port statistics.
Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an Ethernet port on the switch.
Figure 18 Status: Port Details
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
59
Chapter 5 System Status and Port Statistics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 8 Status: Port Details
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port Info
Link
Status
LACP
TxPkts
RxPkts
Errors
This field displays the speed (either 10M for 10Mbps, 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for
1000Mbps) and the duplex (F for full duplex or H for half duplex). It also shows the cable type (Copper or Fiber) for the combo ports.
If STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) is enabled, this field displays the STP state of the port
(see
Section 10.1.3 on page 102 for more information).
If STP is disabled, this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up, otherwise, it displays STOP.
This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not.
This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port
This field shows the number of received frames on this port
This field shows the number of received errors on this port.
Tx KB/s
Rx KB/s
This field shows the number kilobytes per second transmitted on this port.
This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port.
Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up.
Tx Packet
The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted.
TX
Packets
This field shows the number of good packets (unicast, multicast and broadcast) transmitted.
Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted.
Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted.
Pause This field shows the number of 802.3x Pause packets transmitted.
Rx Packet
The following fields display detailed information about packets received.
RX
Packets
This field shows the number of good packets (unicast, multicast and broadcast) received.
Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received.
Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received.
Pause
Control
This field shows the number of 802.3x Pause packets received.
This field shows the number of control packets received (including those with CRC error) but it does not include the 802.3x Pause packets.
TX Collision
The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting.
Single
Multiple
This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision.
This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by more than one collision.
Excessive This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions.
Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset.
Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected, that is, after 512 bits of the packets have already been transmitted.
60
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 5 System Status and Port Statistics
Table 8 Status: Port Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error.
RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check) error(s).
Length
Runt
This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range.
This field shows the number of packets received that were too short (shorter than 64 octets), including the ones with CRC errors.
Distribution
64
65-127
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length.
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length.
Poll
128-255
256-511
512-1023 This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length.
1024-
1518
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length.
Giant
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length.
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length.
Interval(s)
Stop
This field shows the number of packets dropped because they were bigger than the maximum frame size.
The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set
Interval.
Click Stop to stop port statistic polling.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
61
Chapter 5 System Status and Port Statistics
62
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 6
Basic Setting
This chapter describes how to configure the System Info, General Setup, Switch Setup, IP
Setup and Port Setup screens.
6.1 Overview
The System Info screen displays general switch information (such as firmware version number) and hardware polling information (such as fan speeds). The General Setup screen allows you to configure general switch identification information. The General Setup screen also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your switch. The real time is then displayed in the switch logs. The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global switch features. The
IP Setup screen allows you to configure a switch IP address, subnet mask(s) and DNS
(domain name server) for management purposes.
6.2 System Information
In the navigation panel, click Basic Setting and System Info to display the screen as shown.
You can check the firmware version number and the device MAC address, and monitor the switch temperature, fan speeds and voltage in this screen.
63
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
Figure 19 System Info
64
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 9 System Info
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the switch for identification purposes.
OS F/W
Version
This field displays the version number of the switch 's current firmware including the date created.
Modem Code
F/W Version
Ethernet
Address
Hardware Monitor
This field displays the version number of the switch 's current VDSL modem code version.
This field refers to the Ethernet MAC (Media Access Control) address of the switch.
Temperature
Unit
Temperature
The switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the temperature rises above the threshold. You may choose the temperature unit
(Centigrade or Fahrenheit) in this field.
IFE8, Switch and ADT7463 refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the circuit board.
Current
MAX
MIN
Threshold
Status
Fan Speed
(RPM)
This shows the current temperature in degrees centigrade at this sensor.
This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor.
This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor.
This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor.
This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above.
If Error displays, check that the fans are working and make sure that you do not block ventilation holes on the switch.
A properly functioning fan is an essential component (along with a sufficiently ventilated, cool operating environment) in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold. Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
Table 9 System Info (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Current
MAX
MIN
Threshold
Status
Voltage (V)
This field displays this fan's current speed in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
This field displays this fan's maximum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute
(RPM).
This field displays this fan's minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute
(RPM).
This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work.
Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed. Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed.
If Error displays, it is recommended that the fan(s) on the switch be replaced by a qualified technician.
The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range.
Current
MAX
MIN
Threshold
Status
This is the current voltage reading.
This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point.
This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point.
This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the switch still works.
Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point; otherwise Error is displayed.
If Error displays, an electronic component might be defective. Have the switch serviced by a qualified technician.
Poll Interval(s) The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set
Interval.
Stop Click Stop to stop port statistic polling.
6.3 General Setup
Click Basic Setting and General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Use this screen to configure the system name, the system time and date and specify the login authentication database priority.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
65
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
Figure 20 General Setup
66
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 10 General Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Name
Location
Contact Person's
Name
Login
Precedence
Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes. This name consists of up to
32 printable characters; spaces are not allowed.
Enter the geographic location (up to 30 characters) of your switch.
Enter the name (up to 30 characters) of the person in charge of this switch.
Use this drop-down list box to select which database the switch should use (first) to authenticate an administrator (user for switch management).
Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control Logins screen. The
RADIUS is an external server. Before you specify the priority, make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first.
Select Local Only to have the switch just check the local user accounts configured in the Access Control Logins screen.
Select Local then RADIUS to have the switch check the local user accounts configured in the Access Control Logins screen. If the user name is not found, the switch then checks the user database on the specified RADIUS server. You need to configure Port Authentication RADIUS first.
Select RADIUS Only to have the switch just check the user database on the specified RADIUS server for a login username and password.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
Table 10 General Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Use Time Server when Bootup
Time Server IP
Address
Current Time
New Time
(hh:min:ss)
Current Date
New Date (yyyymm-dd)
Time Zone
Apply
Enter the time service protocol that a timeserver sends when you turn on the switch. Not all time servers support all protocols, so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works. The main differences between them are the time format.
When you select the Daytime (RFC 867) format, the switch displays the day, month, year and time with no time zone adjustment. When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone.
Time (RFC-868) format displays a 4-byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970/1/1 at 0:0:0.
NTP (RFC-1305) is similar to Time (RFC-868).
None is the default value. Enter the time manually. Each time you turn on the switch, the time and date will be reset to 2000-1-1 0:0.
Enter the IP address of your timeserver. The switch searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds. If you select a timeserver that is unreachable, then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds. Please wait.
This field displays the time you open this menu (or refresh the menu).
Enter the new time in hour, minute and second format. The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply.
This field displays the date you open this menu.
Enter the new date in year, month and day format. The new date then appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply.
Select the time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinated), formerly known as GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) and your time zone from the drop-down list box.
Click Apply to save the settings.
6.4 Introduction to VLANs
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
In MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
67
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
"
VLAN is unidirectional; it only governs outgoing traffic.
See
Chapter 7 on page 87 for information on port-based and IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLANs.
6.5 Switch Setup Screen
Click Basic Setting and then Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802.1Q or Port
Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen. Refer to the chapter on VLAN.
Figure 21 Switch Setup
68
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 11 Switch Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Type
Bridge Control
Protocol
Transparency
MAC Address
Learning
Choose 802.1Q or Port Based. The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802.1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen.
See
Chapter 7 on page 87 for more information.
Select Active to allow the switch to handle bridging control protocols (STP for example). You also need to define how to treat a BPDU in the Port Setup screen.
MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts. For MAC address learning to occur on a port, the port must be active.
Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 3000 seconds. This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out (and must be relearned).
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
Table 11 Switch Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
GARP Timer: Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leave All message terminates all registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values. See the chapter on
VLAN setup for more background information.
Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a Join Period timer. The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and
65535 milliseconds; the default is 200 milliseconds. See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information.
Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds.
Each port has a single Leave Period timer. Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer; the default is 600 milliseconds.
Leave All
Timer
Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a single Leave All Period timer. Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer; the default is 1000 milliseconds.
Priority Queue Assignment
IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port. Use the following fields to configure the priority level-to-physical queue mapping.
The switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels. On the switch, traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested.
Priority Level (The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p).
Level 7
Level 6
Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.
Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay).
Level 5
Level 4
Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.
Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems
Network Architecture) transactions.
Level 3
Level 2
Level 1
Level 0
Apply
Cancel
Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
This is for “spare bandwidth”.
This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.
Typically used for best-effort traffic.
Click Apply to save the settings.
Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
6.6 IP Setup
Use the IP Setup screen to configure the default gateway device, the management IP address and the default domain name server.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
69
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
6.6.1 Management IP Address
The switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network. The factory default inband IP address is 192.168.1.1 and out-of-band management IP is 192.168.0.1. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. The factory default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
You can configure up to 128 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the switch from the ports belonging to the pre-defined VLAN(s).
"
You must configure a VLAN first.
Figure 22 IP Setup
70
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 12 IP Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Domain Name
Server
Default
Management
Enter the IP address of the domain name server in dotted decimal notation, for example 192.168.1.20.
Select which traffic flow (In-Band or Out-of-band) the switch is to use to send packets with an unknown source or that originated from the switch itself (such as
SNMP traps).
Select Out-of-band to have the switch send the packets to the out-of-band management port. This means that device(s) connected to the other port(s) do not receive these packets.
Select In-Band to have the switch send the packets to all ports except the out-ofband management port. This means that device(s) connected to out-of-band management port do not receive these packets.
In-band Management IP Address
DHCP Client Select this option if you have a DHCP server that can assign the switch an IP address and subnet mask, a default gateway IP address and a domain name server
IP address.
Static IP
Address
Select this option if you don't have a DHCP server or if you wish to assign static IP address information to the switch. You need to fill in the following fields when you select this option.
IP Address Enter the IP address of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example
192.168.1.1.
IP Subnet
Mask
Enter the IP subnet mask of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example
255.255.255.0.
Default
Gateway
VID
Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation, for example 192.168.1.254
Enter the VLAN identification number associated with the switch IP address. This is the VLAN ID of the CPU and is used for management only. The default is "1". All ports, by default, are fixed members of this "management VLAN" in order to manage the device from any port. If a port is not a member of this VLAN, then users on that port cannot access the device. To access the switch make sure the port that you are connected to is a member of Management VLAN.
Out-of-band Management IP Address
IP Address Enter the IP address of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example
192.168.0.1.
IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example
255.255.255.0.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save the settings.
Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
In-band IP Addresses
You can create up to 128 IP addresses, which are used to access and manage the switch from the ports belonging to the pre-defined VLAN(s). You must configure a VLAN first.
IP Address Enter the IP address for managing the switch by the members of the VLAN specified in the VID field below.
IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation.
VID Type the VLAN group identification number.
Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
71
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
Table 12 IP Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Manageable Select this option to allow device management using this IP address setting.
Clear this option to set the switch to block management access using this IP address.
Add to save the new rule to the switch. It then displays in the summary table at the bottom of the screen.
Cancel
Index
Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to edit the rule.
IP Address This field displays the IP address.
IP Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask.
VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.
Default Gateway This field displays the IP address of the default gateway.
Manageable
Delete
Cancel
This field displays whether device management on this IP address is allowed.
Check the rule(s) that you want to remove in the Delete column, then click the
Delete button.
Click Cancel to clear the selected checkboxes in the Delete column.
6.7 Port Setup
Click Basic Setting and then Port Setup in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen. Use this screen to configure general VDSL and Ethernet port settings.
72
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Figure 23 Port Setup
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 13 Port Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ports 1 .. 16
Port
Active
Name
This is the port index number.
Select this check box to enable a port. The factory default for all ports is enabled. A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur.
Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port. You can enter up to 64 alphanumerical characters.
Note: Due to space limitation, the port name may be truncated in some web configurator screens.
Type
Profile
This field displays VDSL for the VDSL ports.
Select a VDSL line profile from the drop-down list box.
This field displays the profile names you configure in the VDSL Profile Setup screen.
Refer to
for more information.
PSD Profile Select a VDSL PSD profile from the drop-down list box.
This field displays the profile names you configure in the VDSL PSD Profile Setup screen. Refer to
for more information.
Alarm Profile Select a VDSL alarm profile from the drop-down list box.
This field displays the alarm profile names you configure in the VDSL Alarm Profile
Setup screen. Refer to
Section 6.10 on page 80 fore more information.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
73
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
Table 13 Port Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses. Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port.
The switch uses IEEE 802.3x flow control in full duplex mode and back pressure flow control in half duplex mode.
IEEE 802.3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port, causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill.
Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a "collision" signal to the sending port (mimicking a state of packet collision) causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later. Select Flow Control to enable it.
802.1P Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a (802.1p) priority queue tag.
See Priority Queue Assignment in
for more information.
BPDU Control Configure the way to treat BPDUs received on this port. You must activate bridging control protocol transparency in the Switch Setup screen first.
Select Peer to process any BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) received on this port.
Select Tunnel to forward BPDUs received on this port.
Select Discard to drop any BPDU received on this port.
Select Network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU.
Ports 17, 18
Port
Active
This is the port index number.
Select this check box to enable a port. The factory default for all ports is enabled. A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur.
Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port. You can enter up to 64 alphanumerical characters.
Note: Due to space limitation, the port name may be truncated in some web configurator screens.
Type This field displays 10/100/1000M for the Gigabit/ mini GBIC combo ports or 1000M for the mini GBIC ports.
Speed/Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the connection on this port. Choices are
Auto, 10M/Half Duplex, 10M/Full Duplex, 100M/Half Duplex, 100M/Full Duplex and 1000M/Full Duplex.
Selecting Auto (auto-negotiation) allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support. When auto-negotiation is turned on, a port on the switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode. If the peer port does not support auto-negotiation or turns off this feature, the switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode. When the switch’s auto-negotiation is turned off, a port uses the pre-configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection, thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect.
74
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
Table 13 Port Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses. Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port.
The switch uses IEEE802.3x flow control in full duplex mode and back pressure flow control in half duplex mode.
IEEE802.3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port, causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill.
Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a "collision" signal to the sending port (mimicking a state of packet collision) causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later. Select Flow Control to enable it.
802.1P Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a (802.1p) priority queue tag.
See Priority Queue Assignment in
for more information.
BPDU Control Configure the way to treat BPDUs received on this port. You must activate bridging control protocol transparency in the Switch Setup screen first.
Select Peer to process any BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) received on this port.
Select Tunnel to forward BPDUs received on this port.
Select Discard to drop any BPDU received on this port.
Select Network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save the settings.
Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
6.8 VDSL Parameters
The following sections describe the VDSL parameters you configure in the following screens:
• VDSL Profile Setup (see Section 6.9 on page 77 ).
• VDSL Alarm Profile Setup (see
• VDSL PSD Profile Setup (see
6.8.1 Frequency Band Plan
Each VDSL mode operates in a different frequency band allocation, resulting in different upstream and downstream speeds. Your VES switch automatically changes the band plan based on the loop condition and loop length.
All of the band plans include an optional band. Use the optional band for upstream transmission which is to be negotiated during line initiation.
6.8.2 Configured Versus Actual Rate
You configure the maximum rate of an individual VDSL port by modifying its profile (see the
VDSL Profile Setup screen) or assigning the port to a different profile (see the Port Setup screen). However, the actual rate varies depending on factor such as transmission range and interference.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
75
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
6.8.3 PSD
PSD (Power Spectral Density) defines the distribution of a VDSL line’s power in the frequency domain. A PSD mask specifies the maximum allowable PSD for a line.
6.8.4 UPBO
In a network with varying telephone wiring lengths, the PSD on each line is different. This causes crosstalk between the lines. Enable UPBO (Upstream Power Back Off) to allow the switch to adjust the transmit PSD of all lines based on a reference line length so that the PSD at the receiving end is the same.
6.8.5 Latency Modes
There are two latency modes: interleave and fast.
• Interleave
Interleave delay is the wait (in milliseconds) that determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved (assembled) and then transmitted. Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction (Reed- Solomon) is necessary due to a less-than-ideal telephone line. The bigger the delay, the bigger the data block size, allowing better error correction to be performed.
Reed-Solomon codes are block-based error correcting codes with a wide range of applications. The Reed-Solomon encoder takes a block of digital data and adds extra
"redundant" bits. The Reed-Solomon decoder processes each block and attempts to correct errors and recover the original data.
• Fast
Fast mode means no interleaving takes place and transmission is faster (a “fast channel”).
This would be suitable if you have a good line where little error correction is necessary.
6.8.6 Rate Adaption
Rate adaption is the ability of a device to adjust from the configured transmission rate to the attainable transmission rate automatically depending on the line quality. The VDSL transmission rate then stays at the new rate or adjusts if line quality improves or deteriorates.
The switch determines line quality using the Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR). SNR is the ratio of the amplitude of the actual signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. A low SNR indicates poor line quality.
If you disable transmission rate adjustment and the attainable speeds cannot match configured speeds, then the VDSL link may go down or link communications may be sporadic due to line errors and consequent retransmissions
Enable the switch to adjust to a new lower rate when the line quality deteriorates until the connection is broken. The switch will first disconnect and then re-establish the line connection to maintain connectivity. However, the new line rate might be lower or higher than the configured line rate.
76
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
6.8.7 RFI (Radio Frequency Interference)
RFI is induced noise on the lines by surrounding radio frequency electromagnetic radiation from sources such as AM and HAM radio stations. Since the VDSL uses a much larger frequency range that overlaps with other radio frequency systems, signals from VDSL lines and other radio systems interfere with each other. To avoid performance degradation due to
RFI, set the switch to not transmit VDSL signals in the RFI band.
6.8.8 VDSL Profiles
A profile is a table that contains a list of pre-configured VDSL line settings or VDSL alarm threshold settings. Each VDSL port has one (and only one) line and alarm profile assigned to it at any given time.
Profiles allow you to configure VDSL ports efficiently. You can configure all of the VDSL ports with the same profile, thus removing the need to configure the VDSL ports one-by-one.
You can also change an individual VDSL port by assigning it a different profile.
For example, you could set up different profiles for different kinds of accounts (for example, economy, standard and premium). Assign the appropriate profile to a VDSL port and it takes care of a large part of the port’s configuration.
6.9 VDSL Profile Setup
The line profile defines VDSL parameters such as the payload rates, the upstream/downstream signal noise margins and impulse noise protection. You can configure multiple profiles, including profiles for troubleshooting.
To configure or view VDSL profiles, click Basic Setting and VDSL Profile Setup to display the screen as shown next.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
77
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
Figure 24 VDSL Profile Setup
78
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 14 VDSL Profile Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name
Slow Channel
Payload Rate
Fast Channel
Payload Rate
Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes.
Specifies the maximum/minimum slow channel data rate in bits/second. Enter a number between 104960 and 64.
Specifies the maximum/minimum fast channel data rate in bits/second. Enter a number between 104960 and 64.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
Table 14 VDSL Profile Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Rate Adaptive
Max SNR
Target SNR
Min SNR
MaxInterleave
Delay
Max Aggregate
Power
Rate Ratio
Rate adaption is the ability of a device to adjust from the configured transmission rate to the attainable transmission rate automatically depending on the line quality.
The VDSL transmission rate then stays at the new rate or adjusts if line quality improves or deteriorates.
Select a rate adaptive mode. Select Manual to disable transmission rate adjustment. Select AdaptAtInit to enable the switch to adjust to a new lower rate when the line quality deteriorates until the connection is broken.
Select the maximum SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio) margin allowed on the channel.
Select the target SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio) margin for the channel.
Select the minimum SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio) margin allowed on the channel.
Specify maximum interleave delay for the slow channel. It is recommended that you configure the same latency delay for both downstream and upstream.
Specify the maximum aggregate power level for upstream and downstream transmission.
Select to use the data rate allocated for the fast or slow channel. Valid values are
0 and 100.
Enter 0 to use slow channel (at the rate you specified in the Slow Channel
Payload Rate field) which is best suited for data transmission.
Enter 100 to use fast channel (at the rate you specified in the Fast Channel
Payload Rate field) for latency-sensitive applications (such as voice).
Impulse Noise
Protection
Specify the level of impulse noise (burst) protection (in microseconds) for a slow
(or interleaved) channel. Enter a number between 0 and 1275.
FEC Redundancy This field displays the Forward Error Correction (FEC) redundancy overhead for a fast channel.
This field is neither configurable nor applicable at the time of writing.
Select a PSD mask for the upstream and downstream traffic. Template PSD
Mask
PBO Control Set the upstream PBO control. PBO (Power Back Off) allows the switch to provide better service in a network environment with telephone wiring of varying lengths.
Select Disable to disable this feature.
Select Auto to set the switch to automatically adjust the power backoff.
Select Manual to specify a power backoff level in the PBO Level field.
PBO Level
Band Plan
If you select Manual in the PBO Control field, select a PBO level.
Specify a VDSL band plan to use for the line.
Select BandPlan998 for ITU-T G.993.1 Bandplan-A and ANSI Plan 998.
Band Plan FX This field displays the band frequency range (3750 to 12000) between the D2 and
U2 bands.
This field is neither configurable nor applicable at the time of writing.
Your switch automatically selects a standard to use for VDSL services. Applicable
Standard
Deployment
Scenario
Specify a VDSL deployment scenario.
Select FTTCab if the switch is located in a street cabinet.
Select FTTEx if the switch is located at the central office (CO).
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
79
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
Table 14 VDSL Profile Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Compatible Mode Specify the starting band of the frequency range used by VDSL services. The end frequency band varies depending on the VDSL2 profile (frequency plan) (8a, 8b,
8c, 8d, 12a, 12b, 17a, or 30a) applied to the switch.
This can avoid interference with other services (such as ISDN, ADSL or ADSL2 provided by other device) on the same bundle of lines.
ISDN in Europe uses a frequency range of up to 80 kHz, while ISDN in Japan uses a frequency range of up to 640 kHz. ADSL utilizes the 1.1 MHz band. Both ADSL2 and ADSL 2+ utilize the 2.2 MHz band.
Select None to turn on any tone (over 25 kHz). The VDSL services then use the frequency bands above 138 kHz.
Select 640kHz to have the VDSL services use the frequency bands above 640 kHz.
Select 1100kHz to turn off all tones below 1.1 MHz. The VDSL services then use the frequency bands above 1.1 MHz.
Select 2200kHz to disable all tones below 2.2 MHz. The VDSL services then use the frequency bands above 2.2 MHz.
Ham Band Plan To avoid performance degradation due to RFI (Radio Frequency Interference), you can set your switch not to transmit signals in the pre-defined HAM (Handheld
Amateur Radio) radio band(s).
Optional Band Specify whether the switch is to use the optional band for the upstream traffic.
For POTS, the optional bands range from 25 to 138 K.
For ISDN, the optional bands range from 138 - 276 K.
The optional bands are not supported in a VDSL1 device.
Line Type
Add
Cancel
Clear
Name
Payload Rate
This displays the VDSL line type (fastOrInterleaved), that means either fast or interleaved channel exists, but only one works at a time.
Click Add to save the new profile to the switch. It then displays in the summary table at the bottom of the screen.
Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.
This field displays the descriptive name for this profile.
This field displays the configured maximum upstream and downstream payload rates in megabits per second.
SNR Margin
Applied Ports
Delete
Cancel
This field displays the configured upstream and downstream signal to noise ration in decibels.
You can apply a profile to a VDSL port in the Port Setup screen.
This field displays the VDSL port number(s) to which this profile is applied.
Check the rule(s) that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the
Delete button.
Click Cancel to clear the selected checkboxes in the Delete column.
6.10 VDSL Alarm Profile Setup
Alarm profiles define VDSL port alarm thresholds. The device sends an alarm trap and generates a syslog entry when the thresholds of the alarm profile are exceeded.
Click Basic Settings and VDSL Alarm Profile Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
80
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Figure 25 VDSL Alarm Profile Setup
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 15 VDSL Alarm Profile Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name
15 Minute LOFs
Threshold
15 Minute LOSs
Threshold
15 Minute LPRs
Threshold
15 Minute LOLs
Threshold
15 Minute ESs
Threshold
15 Minute SESs
Threshold
15 Minute UASs
Threshold
Initialization
Failure
Add
Cancel
Clear
Name
LOSs
ESs
Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes.
Enter the number of Loss Of Framing seconds (LOFs) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
Enter the number of Loss Of Signals seconds (LOSs) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
Enter the number of Loss of PoweR seconds (LPRs) is permitted to occur within
15 minutes.
Enter the number of Loss Of Link seconds (LOLs) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
Enter the number of Errored Seconds (ESs) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
Enter the number of Severely Errored Seconds (SESs) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
Enter the number of UnAvailable Seconds (UASs) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
Select On to trigger an alarm for an initialization failure trap.
Select Off to disable trap sending when a line fails to initialize.
Click Add to save the new rule to the switch. It then displays in the summary table at the bottom of the screen.
Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.
This field displays the descriptive name for the alarm profile.
This field displays the number of Loss Of Signal (LOS) seconds that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
This field displays the number of Errored Seconds (ESs) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
81
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
Table 15 VDSL Alarm Profile Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SESs
Init
Applied Ports
Delete
Cancel
This field displays the number of Severely Errored Seconds (SESs) that are permitted to occur within 15 minutes.
This field displays whether the initialization failure trap sending feature is enabled
(On) or not (Off).
You can apply a profile to a VDSL port in the Port Setup screen.
This field displays the VDSL port number(s) to which this profile is applied.
Check the rule(s) that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the
Delete button.
Click Cancel to clear the selected checkboxes in the Delete column.
6.11 VDSL PSD Profile Setup
PSD (Power Spectral Density) profiles define the allowable downstream and upstream PSD values for a line. In a PSD profile, you can configure a set of breakpoints, each of which is defined by a frequency and PSD level. The set of breakpoints forms a PSD mask that specifies the maximum transmission power of each VDSL frequency band. If the frequency range used by the Switch and other devices overlap, you can configure the PSD of your Switch to prevent interference with other nearby signals.
In the following example, the Switch’s PSD is configured to not exceed the PSD mask (dashed line) within the 5 MHz to 16 MHz frequency range. After configuration, the shaded area is the
Switch’s actual PSD for the specified frequency range.
Figure 26 PSD-Frequency Example
82
Click Basic Settings and VDSL PSD Profile Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Figure 27 VDSL PSD Profile Setup
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 16 VDSL PSD Profile Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes. This field is configurable only when you click the Add New Profile link.
Add New Profile Click this link to add a new profile.
Add Click Add to save the new profile to the Switch. It then displays in the summary table at the bottom of the screen.
Down Stream /
Up Stream
Tone Freq
PSD Level (dBm/
Hz)
Add
BreakPoint
Tone Freq
PSD Level (dBm/
Hz)
Delete
Enter a downstream or upstream tone frequency between 0 and 30000 (in kHz).
Specify a downstream or upstream PSD value between 125 and 1400 in units of -
0.1 dBm/Hz. For example, if you want to set the transmit power to -20 dBm/Hz, enter 200.
Click Add to save the new breakpoint to the Switch. It then displays in the summary table in the center of the screen.
This is the index number of each breakpoint.
This displays the tone frequency for this breakpoint.
This displays the transmit power for this breakpoint.
Profile Name
Applied Ports
Check the breakpoint(s) that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button.
This field displays the descriptive name for this profile.
You can apply a profile to a VDSL port in the Port Setup screen.
This field displays the VDSL port number(s) to which this profile is applied.
Delete
Cancel
Check the profile(s) that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button.
Click Cancel to clear the selected checkboxes in the Delete column.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
83
Chapter 6 Basic Setting
84
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
P
ART
III
Advanced
85
86
C H A P T E R 7
VLAN
The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen. This chapter shows you how to configure 802.1Q tagged and port-based VLANs.
7.1 Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN
A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The
VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information), starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame).
The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094.
TPID
2 Bytes
User Priority
3 Bits
CFI
1 Bit
VLAN ID
12 Bits
7.1.1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames
Each port on the switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch to an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware switch, the switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware switch to an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch, the switch first decides where to forward the frame, and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port's default VID. The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports, but this can be changed.
87
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 VLAN
7.2 Automatic VLAN Registration
GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches.
7.2.1 GARP
GARP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol) allows network switches to register and deregister attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN. GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application, for example, GVRP.
7.2.1.1 GARP Timers
Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leave All message terminates all registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values.
7.2.2 GVRP
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network. Enable this function to permit VLANs groups beyond the local switch.
Table 17 IEEE 802.1Q Terminology
VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION
VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually.
VLAN Administrative
Control
Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration/ deregistration process.
Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members.
VLAN Tag Control
VLAN Port
Registration
Forbidden
Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP.
Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted.
Untagged
Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the specified VLAN.
Port VID
Ports belonging to the specified don't tag all outgoing frames transmitted.
This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port received.
Acceptable frame type
Ingress filtering
You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames or just tagged incoming frames on a port.
If set, the switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member
88
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 VLAN
7.3 Port VLAN Trunking
Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port. This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices.
Refer to the following figure. Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 (V1 and V2) on devices A and B. Without VLAN Trunking, you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C, D and E; otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags. However, with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port(s) in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices (A and B). C, D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 (VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches) to pass through their VLAN trunking port(s).
Figure 28 Port VLAN Trunking
7.4 Select the VLAN Type
Select a VLAN type in the Switch Setup screen.
Figure 29 Switch Setup: Select VLAN Type
7.5 Static VLAN
Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be
• sent to a VLAN group as normal depends on its VLAN tag.
• sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not.
• blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag.
You can also tag all outgoing frames (that were previously untagged) from a port with the specified VID.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
89
Chapter 7 VLAN
7.5.1 Static VLAN Status
Click Advanced Application > VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN
Status screen as shown next.
Use this screen to view the current static VLAN group(s) you have configured. Refer to
for background information.
Figure 30 VLAN > VLAN Status
90
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 18 VLAN > VLAN Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
The Number of
VLAN
Index
VID
Port Number
This is the number of VLANs configured on the switch.
This is the VLAN index number.
This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen.
This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN. A tagged port is marked as T, an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN in marked as “–“.
Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up.
Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the switch; dynamic - using GVRP,
static - added as a permanent entry or other - added using Multicast VLAN
Registration (MVR).
Poll Interval(s) The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set
Interval.
Stop Click Stop to halt polling statistics.
Change Pages Click Previous Page or Next Page to show the previous/next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 VLAN
7.5.2 Configure a Static VLAN
To configure a static VLAN, click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next.
Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be
• sent to a VLAN group as normal depends on its VLAN tag.
• sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not.
• blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag.
You can also tag all outgoing frames (that were previously untagged) from a port with the specified VID. Refer to
for background information.
Figure 31 VLAN > Static VLAN
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 19 VLAN > Static VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ACTIVE
Name
Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings.
Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes.
VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static VLAN; the valid range is between 1 and 4094.
Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring.
Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP. This is the default selection.
Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group.
Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group.
Tagging
Add
Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames (that were previously untagged) transmitted with this VLAN Group ID.
Click Add to add the settings as a new entry in the summary table below.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
91
Chapter 7 VLAN
Table 19 VLAN > Static VLAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Cancel
Clear
VID
Active
Name
Delete
Cancel
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Click Clear to start configuring the screen again.
This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group. Click the number to edit the
VLAN settings.
This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled (Yes) or disabled (No).
This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group.
Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
7.5.3 Configure VLAN Port Setting
To configure the VLAN settings on a port, click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN
Status screen. Refer to Section 7.1 on page 87 for background information.
Figure 32 VLAN > VLAN Port Setting
92
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 20 VLAN > VLAN Port Setting label description
GVRP
Port Isolation
Port
Ingress Check
PVID
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network.
Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local switch.
Port Isolation allows each port to communicate only with the CPU management port and the uplink ports but not communicate with each other. This option is the most limiting but also the most secure.
This field displays the port number.
Select this check box to discard incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member.
Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering.
Enter a number between 1and 4094 as the port VLAN ID.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 VLAN
Table 20 VLAN > VLAN Port Setting (continued) label description
GVRP
Acceptable
Frame Type
VLAN Trunking
Apply
Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port.
Specify the type of frames allowed on a port. Choices are All, Tag Only and
Untag Only.
Select All to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port. This is the default setting.
Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port. All untagged frames will be dropped.
Select Untag Only to accept only untagged frames on this port. All tagged frames will be dropped.
Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers (but not ports directly connected to end users) to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the switch.
Click Apply to save the changes
7.6 Port-based VLAN
Port-based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port.
Port-based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port. Therefore, if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, for example, between conference rooms in a hotel, you must define the egress (an egress port is an outgoing port, that is, a port through which a data packet leaves) for both ports.
Port-based VLANs are specific only to the switch on which they were created.
"
When you activate port-based VLAN, the switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1.
You cannot change it.
"
In screens (such as IP Setup and Filtering) that require a VID, you must enter
1 as the VID.
The port-based VLAN setup screen is shown next. The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports.
7.6.1 Configure a Port-based VLAN
Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Switch Setup screen (see Figure 29 on page 89 )
and then click VLAN from the navigation panel to display the next screen.
93
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 VLAN
Figure 33 Port Based VLAN Setup (All Connected)
94
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Figure 34 Port Based VLAN Setup (Port Isolation)
Chapter 7 VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 21 Port Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Setting
Wizard
Incoming
Outgoing
Choose All connected or Port isolation.
All connected means all ports can communicate with each other, that is, there are no virtual LANs. All incoming and outgoing ports are selected. This option is the most flexible but also the least secure.
Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other. All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected. This option is the most limiting but also the most secure.
After you make your selection, click Set (top right of screen) to display the screens as mentioned above. You can still customize these settings by adding/deleting incoming or outgoing ports, but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen.
These are the ingress ports; an ingress port is an incoming port, that is, a port through which a data packet enters. If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, you must define the ingress port for both ports. The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the left (its outgoing port). CPU refers to the switch management port. By default it forms a VLAN with all
Ethernet ports. If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the switch cannot be managed from that port.
These are the egress ports; an egress port is an outgoing port, that is, a port through which a data packet leaves. If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, you must define the egress port for both ports. CPU refers to the switch management port. By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports. If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the switch cannot be managed from that port.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
95
Chapter 7 VLAN
Table 21 Port Based VLAN Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
96
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 8
Static MAC Forward Setup
Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding.
8.1 Static MAC Forwarding Overview
A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address learning table. Static MAC addresses do not age out. When you set up static MAC address rules, you are setting static MAC addresses for a port. This may reduce the need for broadcasting.
8.2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding
Click Advanced Applications > Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown. Scroll down to the bottom of the screen to view the summary table for the settings.
Figure 35 Static MAC Forwarding
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 22 Static MAC Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Name
Select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box.
Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
97
Chapter 8 Static MAC Forward Setup
Table 22 Static MAC Forwarding (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs.
Note: Static MAC addresses do not age out.
VID
Port
Enter the VLAN identification number.
Select a port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically forwarded.
Add
Cancel
Clear
Index
Active
After you set the fields above, click Add to insert a new rule.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Click an index number to modify the settings.
Name
This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active (Yes) or not (No). You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it.
This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address-forwarding rule.
MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs.
VID
Port
This field displays the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs.
This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded.
Delete
Cancel
Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
98
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 9
Filtering
This chapter discusses static IP and MAC address port filtering.
9.1 Filtering Overview
Filtering means sifting traffic going through the switch based on the source and/or destination
MAC addresses and VLAN group (ID).
9.2 Configure a Filtering Rule
Click Advanced Application > Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next. Scroll down to the bottom of the screen to view the summary table for the settings.
Figure 36 Filtering
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 23 FIltering
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Name
Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box.
Type a descriptive name for this filter rule. This is for identification purpose only.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
99
Chapter 9 Filtering
Clear
Index
Active
Name
MAC
Address
Action
Delete
Cancel
Table 23 FIltering (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Action
MAC
VID
Add
Select Discard source to drop frame from the source MAC address (specified in the
MAC field). The switch can still send frames to the MAC address.
Select Discard destination to drop frames to the destination MAC address (specified in the MAC field). The switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address.
Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to/from the MAC address specified in the MAC field.
Type a MAC address in valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs.
Type the VLAN group identification number.
Click Add to save the new rule to the switch. It then displays in the summary table at the bottom of the screen.
Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.
This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to change the settings.
This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated.
This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
This field displays the source/destination MAC address with the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs.
This field displays the filter action.
Check the rule(s) that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the
Delete button.
Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox(es) in the Delete column.
100
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 10
Spanning Tree Protocol
This chapter introduces the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP).
10.1 STP/RSTP Overview
(R)STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches, bridges or routers. It allows a switch to interact with other (R)STP -compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network.
The switch uses IEEE 802.1w RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) that allows faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP (while also being backwards compatible with STPonly aware bridges). In RSTP, topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change. In STP, a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge that then notifies the network. Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database. In RSTP, the port states are Discarding, Learning, and Forwarding.
"
In this user’s guide, “STP” refers to both STP and RSTP.
10.1.1 STP Terminology
The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree; it is the bridge with the lowest identifier value
(MAC address).
Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port. It is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached. The slower the media, the higher the cost.
Table 24 STP Path Costs
LINK
SPEED
RECOMMENDED
VALUE
RECOMMENDED
RANGE
ALLOWED
RANGE
4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Path
Cost
Path
Cost
Path
Cost
10Mbps
16Mbps
100
62
50 to 600
40 to 400
1 to 65535
1 to 65535
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
101
Chapter 10 Spanning Tree Protocol
Table 24 STP Path Costs
LINK
SPEED
RECOMMENDED
VALUE
100Mbps 19 Path
Cost
Path
Cost
Path
Cost
1Gbps
10Gbps
4
2
RECOMMENDED
RANGE
10 to 60
3 to 10
1 to 5
ALLOWED
RANGE
1 to 65535
1 to 65535
1 to 65535
On each bridge, the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root.
It is the port on this switch with the lowest path cost to the root (the root path cost). If there is no root port, then this switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network.
For each LAN segment, a designated bridge is selected. This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN.
10.1.2 How STP Works
After a bridge determines the lowest cost-spanning tree with STP, it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs, and disables all other ports that participate in STP. Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports, eliminating any possible network loops.
STP-aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) periodically. When the bridged LAN topology changes, a new spanning tree is constructed.
Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs
(Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the root bridge. If a bridge does not get a Hello
BPDU after a predefined interval (Max Age), the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down. This bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re-establish a valid network topology.
10.1.3 STP Port States
STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping. A bridge port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops.
Table 25 STP Port States
PORT STATE DESCRIPTION
Disabled
Blocking
Listening
Learning
Forwarding
STP is disabled (default).
Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed.
All BPDUs are received and processed.
All BPDUs are received and processed. Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded.
All BPDUs are received and processed. All information frames are received and forwarded.
102
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Spanning Tree Protocol
10.2 STP Status
Click Advanced Application > Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the screen. View current STP status on the switch in this screen.
Refer to Section 10.1 on page 101 for background information.
Figure 37 Spanning Tree Protocol Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 26 Spanning Tree Protocol Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Spanning Tree
Protocol
Configuration
This field displays Running if STP is activated. Otherwise, it displays Down.
Bridge
Bridge ID
Hello Time
(second)
Click Configuration to configure STP settings. Refer to
Root refers to the base of the spanning tree (the root bridge). Our Bridge is this switch. This switch may also be the root bridge.
This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address. This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the switch is the root switch.
This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the root switch transmits a configuration message. The root bridge determines Hello Time, Max Age and
Forwarding Delay
Max Age (second) This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure.
Forwarding Delay
(second)
This is the time (in seconds) the root switch will wait before changing states (that is, listening to learning to forwarding).
Cost to Bridge
Port ID
This is the path cost from the root port on this switch to the root switch.
This is the priority and number of the port on the switch through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
103
Chapter 10 Spanning Tree Protocol
Table 26 Spanning Tree Protocol Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured.
Topology
Changed Times
Time Since Last
Change
Poll Interval(s)
This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured.
Stop
The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval.
Click Stop to halt STP statistic polling.
10.3 Configure STP
To configure STP, click the Configuration link in the Spanning Tree Protocol screen as
shown next. Refer to Section 10.1 on page 101 for background information.
Figure 38 Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration
104
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 27 Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status
Active
Bridge Priority
Hello Time
Click Status to display the Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen.
Select this check box to activate STP. Clear this checkbox to disable STP.
Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch, root port and designated port.
The switch with the highest priority (lowest numeric value) becomes the STP root switch. If all switches have the same priority, the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch. Select a value from the drop-down list box.
The lower the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this bridge.
Bridge Priority determines the root bridge, which in turn determines Hello Time,
Max Age and Forwarding Delay.
This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) configuration message generations by the root switch. The allowed range is 1 to
10 seconds.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Spanning Tree Protocol
Table 27 Spanning Tree Protocol > Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Max Age This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure. All switch ports (except for designated ports) should receive BPDUs at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information
(provided in the last BPDU) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network. The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds.
Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch will wait before changing states.
This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result. The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds.
As a general rule: 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age >= 2 * (Hello Time + 1)
Port
Active
Priority
Path Cost
Apply
Cancel
This field displays the port number.
Select this check box to activate STP on this port.
Configure the priority for each port here.
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first. The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128.
Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is assigned according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the media, the higher the cost - see
Table 24 on page 101 for more information.
Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
105
Chapter 10 Spanning Tree Protocol
106
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 11
Bandwidth Control
This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth allowed on the ports using the Bandwidth Control screen.
11.1 Configuring Bandwidth Control
Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and/or outgoing traffic on a port.
11.1.1 CIR and PIR
The Committed Information Rate (CIR) is the guaranteed bandwidth for the incoming traffic flow on a port. The Peak Information Rate (PIR) is the maximum bandwidth allowed for the incoming traffic flow on a port when there is no network congestion.
The CIR and PIR should be set for all ports that use the same uplink bandwidth. If the CIR is reached, packets are sent at the rate up to the PIR. When network congestion occurs, packets through the ingress port exceeding the CIR will be marked for drop.
"
The CIR should be less than the PIR.
"
The sum of CIRs cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth.
Click Advanced Application and then Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as shown next.
107
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Bandwidth Control
Figure 39 Bandwidth Control
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 28 Bandwidth Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Port
Active
Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the switch.
This field displays the port number.
Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box.
Ingress Rate
Commit Rate Specify the guaranteed bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the incoming traffic flow on a port. The commit rate should be less than the peak rate.
The sum of commit rates cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth.
Peak Rate
Egress Rate
Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the incoming traffic flow on a port.
Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the outgoing traffic flow on a port. Enter a number between 1000 and 1000 000.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save the settings.
Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration.
108
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 12
Broadcast Storm Control
This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature.
12.1 Broadcast Storm Control Overview
Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast, multicast and destination lookup failure (DLF) packets the switch receives per second on the ports. When the maximum number of allowable broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets is reached per second, the subsequent packets are discarded. Enable this feature to reduce broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets in your network. You can specify limits for each packet type on each port.
12.2 Broadcast Storm Control Setup
Click Advanced Application > Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 40 Broadcast Storm Control
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 29 Broadcast Storm Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Port
Select this check box to enable broadcast storm control on the switch.
This field displays a port number.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
109
Chapter 12 Broadcast Storm Control
Table 29 Broadcast Storm Control (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Broadcast (pkt/s) Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port receives per second.
Multicast (pkt/s) Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second.
DLF (pkt/s)
Apply
Cancel
Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure (DLF) packets the port receives per second.
Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
110
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 13
Mirroring
This chapter shows you how to configure mirroring on the switch.
13.1 Mirroring Overview
Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port (the port you copy the traffic to) in order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference.
13.2 Port Mirroring Configuration
Click Advanced Application > Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen.
Use this screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port
Figure 41 Mirroring
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
111
Chapter 13 Mirroring
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 30 Mirroring
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Monitor
Port
Port
Mirrored
Direction
Apply
Clear this check box to deactivate port mirroring on the switch.
The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in more detail without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port(s). Select this port from this drop-down list box.
This field displays the port number.
Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port.
Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror. Choices are Egress (outgoing), Ingress
(incoming) and Both.
Click Apply to save the changes.
112
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 14
Link Aggregation
This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical, higherbandwidth link.
14.1 Link Aggregation Overview
Link aggregation (trunking) is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher-capacity link. You may want to trunk ports if for example, it is cheaper to use multiple lower-speed links than to under-utilize a high-speed, but more costly, single-port link.
However, the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have. A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports.
14.1.1 Dynamic Link Aggregation
The switch adheres to the IEEE 802.3ad standard for static and dynamic (LACP) port trunking.
The switch supports the link aggregation IEEE802.3ad standard. This standard describes the
Link Aggregate Control Protocol (LACP), which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages trunk groups.
When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port, the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups. LACP also allows port redundancy, that is, if an operational port fails, then one of the “standby” ports become operational without user intervention. Please note that:
• You must connect all ports point-to-point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking.
• LACP only works on full-duplex links.
• All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type, speed, duplex mode and flow control settings.
Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network topology loops.
113
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Link Aggregation
14.1.2 Link Aggregation ID
LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information 1 :
Table 31 Link Aggregation ID: Local Switch
SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER
0000 00-00-00-00-00 0000 00 0000
Table 32 Link Aggregation ID: Peer Switch
SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY
0000 00-00-00-00-00 0000
PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER
00 0000
14.2 Link Aggregation Status
Click Advanced Application > Link Aggregation in the navigation panel. The Link
Aggregation Control Protocol Status screen displays by default.
This screen displays LACP group aggregator ID, member port number(s) and the group status.
Figure 42 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 33 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index This field displays the trunk ID to identify a trunk group, that is, one logical link containing multiple ports.
Aggregator ID This field displays the link aggregation ID. Link aggregation ID consists of the following: system priority, MAC address, key, port priority and port number.
Refer to
Section 14.1.2 on page 114 for more information on this field.
Enabled Ports These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group.
Synchronized
Ports
These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk group.
114
1.
Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group, not the individual port.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Link Aggregation
Table 33 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Poll Interval(s) The text box displays how often (in seconds) this screen refreshes. You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set
Interval.
Stop Click Stop to halt statistic polling.
14.3 Link Aggregation Setup
Click Configuration in the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status screen to display the screen shown next.
See
Section 14.1 on page 113 for background information.
Figure 43 Link Aggregation Control Protocol > Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 34 Link Aggregation Control Protocol > Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).
System
Priority
Group ID
LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65,355. The switch with the lowest system priority (and lowest port number if system priority is the same) becomes the
LACP “server”. The LACP “server” controls the operation of LACP setup. Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregate Control Protocol
(LACP). The smaller the number, the higher the priority level.
The field identifies the link aggregation group, that is, one logical link containing multiple ports
Active
Dynamic
(LACP)
Port
Group
Select this option to activate a trunk group.
Select this check box to enable LACP for a trunk.
This field displays the port number.
Select the trunk group to which a port belongs.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
115
Chapter 14 Link Aggregation
Table 34 Link Aggregation Control Protocol > Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LACP
Timeout
Apply
Cancel
Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up. If a port does not respond after three tries, then it is deemed to be “down” and is removed from the trunk. Set a short timeout (one second) for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible. Select either 1 second or 30 seconds.
Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
116
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 15
Port Authentication
This chapter describes the 802.1x authentication method and RADIUS server connection setup.
15.1 Port Authentication Overview
IEEE 802.1x is an extended authentication protocol
2
that allows support of RADIUS (Remote
Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server.
15.1.1 RADIUS
RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) authentication is a popular protocol used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of (or in addition to) an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device. In essence,
RADIUS authentication allows you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location.
Figure 44 RADIUS Server
15.2 Configure Port Authentication
To enable port authentication, first activate IEEE802.1x security (both on the switch and the port(s)) then configure the RADIUS server settings.
Click Advanced Application > Port Authentication in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
2. At the time of writing, only Windows XP of the Microsoft operating systems supports it. See the Microsoft web site for information on other Windows operating system support. For other operating systems, see its documentation.
If your operating system does not support 802.1x, then you may need to install 802.1x client software.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
117
Chapter 15 Port Authentication
Figure 45 Port Authentication
15.2.1 Activate IEEE 802.1x Security
From the Port Authentication screen, display the configuration screen as shown.
See
Section 15.1 on page 117 for background information.
Figure 46 Port Authentication > 802.1x
118
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 35 Port Authentication > 802.1x
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this check box to permit 802.1x authentication on the switch.
Port
Active
Reauthenticatio n
Reauthenticatio n Timer
Apply
Cancel
Note: You must first enable 802.1x authentication on the switch before configuring it on each port.
This field displays a port number.
Select this checkbox to permit 802.1x authentication on this port. You must first allow 802.1x authentication on the switch before configuring it on each port.
Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re-enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port.
Specify how often a client has to re-enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port.
It is recommended that you enter a number more than 60 seconds. The valid range is between 1 and 65535 seconds.
Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Port Authentication
15.2.2 Configuring RADIUS Server Settings
From the Port Authentication screen, click RADIUS to display the configuration screen as shown.
Use this screen to configure RADIUS server settings. See Section 15.1 on page 117 for
background information.
Figure 47 Port Authentication > RADIUS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 36 Port Authentication > RADIUS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Authentication Server
IP Address Enter the IP address of the external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation.
UDP Port The default port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so.
Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the switch. This key is not sent over the network. This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the switch.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
119
Chapter 15 Port Authentication
120
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 16
Port Security
This chapter shows you how to set up port security.
16.1 Port Security Overview
Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and/or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the switch. The switch can learn up to 16K
MAC addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed
16K.
For maximum port security, enable this feature, disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address(es) for a port. It is not recommended you disable Port Security together with MAC address learning as this will result in many broadcasts.
16.2 Port Security Setup
Click Advanced Application > Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 48 Port Security
121
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 16 Port Security
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 37 Port Security
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Port
Active
Address
Learning
Limited Number of Learned
MAC Address
Apply
Cancel
Select this check box to enable the port security feature on the switch.
This field displays a port number.
Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port. The switch forwards packets whose MAC address(es) is in the MAC address table on this port.
Packets with no matching MAC address(es) are dropped.
Clear this check box to disable the port security feature. The switch forwards all packets on this port.
MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic. For MAC address learning to occur on a port, the port itself must be active with address learning enabled.
Use this field to limit the number of (dynamic) MAC addresses that may be learned on a port. For example, if you set this field to "5" on port 2, then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time. A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out. MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen. The valid range is from 0 to 16K. “0” means this feature is disabled, so the switch will learn MAC addresses up to the global limit of 16K.
Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
122
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 17
Queuing Method
This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported.
17.1 Queuing Method Overview
Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion. Use the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic. See also
Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802.1p Priority in Port Setup for related information.
Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth.
Q3
Q2
Q1
Q0
Q7
Q6
Q5
Q4
The switch has eight physical queues, Q0 to Q7. Q7 has the highest priority and Q0 has the lowest.
Table 38 Physical Queue Priority
QUEUE PRIORITY
6
5
8 (Highest)
7
4
3
2
1 (Lowest)
17.1.1 Strict Priority Queuing (SPQ)
Strict Priority Queuing (SPQ) services queues based on priority only. As traffic comes into the switch, traffic on the highest priority queue, Q3 is transmitted first. When that queue empties, traffic on the next highest-priority queue, Q2 is transmitted until Q2 empties, and then traffic is transmitted on Q1 and so on. If higher priority queues never empty, then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent. SPQ does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements.
123
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Queuing Method
17.1.2 Weighted Fair Scheduling (WFS)
Weighted Fair Scheduling is used to guarantee each queue's minimum bandwidth based on their bandwidth weight (portion) (the number you configure in the Weight field) when there is traffic congestion. WFS is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle.
Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights.
This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues. By default, the weight for Q0 is 1, for Q1 is 2, for Q2 is 3, and so on. Guaranteed bandwidth is calculated as follows:
Guaranteed bandwidth = Queue Weight ÷ Total Queue Weight x Port Speed
For example, using the default setting, Q0 on Port 1 gets a guaranteed bandwidth of:
1 ÷ (1+2+3+4+5+6+7+8) x 100 Mbps = 3 Mbps
17.2 Configuring Queuing
Click Advanced Application > Queuing Method in the navigation panel.
Figure 49 Queuing Method
124
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Queuing Method
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 Queuing Method
LABEL DESCRIPTION
FE Port SPQ
Enable
Strictly Priority services queues based on priority only. When the highest priority queue empties, traffic on the next highest-priority queue begins. Q7 has the highest priority and Q0 the lowest.
Weighted Fair Scheduling is used to guarantee each queue's minimum bandwidth based on their bandwidth portion (weight) (the number you configure in the Weight field). Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights.
This field is applicable only when you select Weighted Fair Scheduling.
Select a queue (Q0 to Q7) to have the switch use Strictly Priority to service the subsequent queue(s) after and including the specified queue for the 10/100 Mbps
Ethernet ports. For example, if you select Q5, the switch services traffic on Q5, Q6 and Q7 using Strictly Priority.
Select None to always use Weighted Fair Scheduling for the 10/100 Mbps
Ethernet ports.
Port This label shows the port you are configuring.
Weight Q0~Q7 When you select Weighted Fair Scheduling, enter the queue weight here.
Bandwidth is divided across the different traffic queues according to their weights.
Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
125
Chapter 17 Queuing Method
126
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 18
Classifier
This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the switch.
18.1 Classifier Overview
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network’s ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-demand.
A layer-2 classifier groups traffic according to the Ethernet type, VLAN group, MAC address and/or port number. A layer-3 classifier groups traffic according to the IP address and/or TCP/
UDP protocol number.
Configure QoS on the switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance. Setting up QoS involves two separate steps:
1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows.
2 Configure policy rules to define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow
(refer to
Chapter 19 on page 133 to configure policy rules).
18.2 Configuring a Classifier
Use the Classifier screen to define the classifiers. After you define the classifier, you can specify actions (or policy) to act upon the traffic that match the rules. To configure policy rules, refer to
Click Advanced Application and Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown.
127
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Classifier
Figure 50 Classifier
128
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 40 Classifier
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Name
Packet
Format
Select this option to enable this rule.
Type a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
Specify the format of the packet. Choices are All, 802.3 tagged, 802.3 untagged,
Ethernet II tagged and Ethernet II untagged.
A value of 802.3 indicates that the packets are formatted according to the IEEE 802.3 standards.
A value of Ethernet II indicates that the packets are formatted according to RFC 894,
Ethernet II encapsulation.
Layer 2
Specify the fields below to configure a layer-2 classifier.
VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify the source VLAN ID in the field provided.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Classifier
Table 40 Classifier (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Ethernet Type Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type number in hexadecimal value. Refer to
Table 41 on page 130 for information.
Select All if you don’t know.
Source
MAC
Address
Port
Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses.
To specify a source, select MAC and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs).
Select the port to which the rule should be applied. You may choose one port only or all ports (All Ports).
Destination
MAC Address Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses.
To specify a destination, select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid
MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs).
Layer 3
Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier.
DSCP Select Any to classify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a
DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided.
IP Protocol Select an IP protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal value. Refer to
for more information.
You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type. This means that the switch will pick out the packets that are sent to establish TCP connections.
Source
IP
Address/
Address
Prefix
Socket
Number
Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask.
Note: You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers.
Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP/UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP/UDP protocol port number.
Destination
IP
Address/
Address
Prefix
Socket
Number
Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask.
Note: You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers.
Add
Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP/UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP/UDP protocol port number.
Click Add to save the changes.
Index
Active
This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to edit the rule.
This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
129
Chapter 18 Classifier
Table 40 Classifier (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name
Rule
Delete
Cancel
This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
This field displays a summary of the classifier rule’s settings.
Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol number.
Table 41 Common Ethernet Type Number
Ethernet Type number
IP ETHII
X.75 Internet
NBS Internet
ECMA Internet
0800
0801
0802
0803
Chaosnet 0804
X.25 Level 3 0805
XNS Compat
Banyan Systems
0807
0BAD
BBN Simnet
IBM SNA
AppleTalk AARP
5208
80D5
80F3
Some of the most common protocol port numbers are:
Table 42 Common Protocol Port Number
PORT NUMBER NAME
21
23
25
53
80
110
FTP
Telnet
SMTP
DNS
HTTP
POP3
18.3 Classifier Example
The following screen shows an example where you configure a classifier that identifies all traffic from MAC address 00:50:ba:ad:4f:81 on port 2.
After you have configured a classifier, you can configure a policy (in the Policy screen) to define action(s) on the classified traffic flow.
130
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Figure 51 Classifier Example
Chapter 18 Classifier
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
131
Chapter 18 Classifier
132
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 19
Policy
This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules.
19.1 Policy Overview
A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria (refer to
for more information). A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network.
19.1.1 DiffServ
DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points
(DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServcompliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.
19.1.2 DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service
(TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field.
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-
DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies.
133
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 19 Policy
19.2 Configuring a Policy
"
You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen. Refer to
Chapter
18 on page 127 for more information.
Click Advanced Application and then Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
134
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Figure 52 Policy
Chapter 19 Policy
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
135
Chapter 19 Policy
Table 43 Policy
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Name
Select this option to enable the policy.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
Classifier(s) This field displays the active classifier(s) you configure in the Classifier screen (refer to
).
Select the classifier(s) to which this policy rule applies. To select more than one classifier, press [SHIFT] and select the choices at the same time.
Parameters
Set the fields below for this policy. You only have to set the field(s) that is related to the action(s) you configure in the Action field.
General
VLAN ID
Egress Port
Outgoing packet format for Egress
Port
Priority
DSCP
TOS
Metering
Specify a VLAN ID number.
Select an outgoing port.
Select Tag to add the specified VID to packets on the specified outgoing port.
Otherwise, select Untag. The switch removes the VLAN tag from the packets.
Specify a priority level.
Specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63.
Specify the type of service (TOS) priority level.
You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow. Traffic that exceeds the maximum bandwidth allocated (in cases where the network is congested) is called out-of-profile traffic.
Bandwidth
Out-of-Profile
DSCP
Forwarding
Specify the bandwidth in mega bits per second (Mbps). Enter a number between 1 and 1023.
Specify a new DSCP number (between 0 and 63) if you want to replace or remark the
DSCP number for out-of-profile traffic.
Action
Specify the action(s) the switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow.
Select No change to forward the packets.
Select Discard packet to drop the packets.
Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to retain the frames that were marked to be dropped before.
Priority
DiffServ
Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames.
Select Set the packet’s 802.1 priority to replace the 802.1 priority field with the value you set in the Priority field.
Select Send the packet to priority queue to put the packets in the designated queue.
Select Replace the 802.1 priority field with IP TOS value to replace the 802.1 priority field with the value you set in the TOS field.
Select No change to keep the TOS and/or DSCP fields in the packets.
Select Set the packet’s TOS field to set the TOS field with the value you configure in the TOS field.
Select Replace the IP TOS field with the 802.1 priority value to replace the TOS field with the value you configure in the Priority field.
Select Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame to set the DSCP field with the value you configure in the DSCP field.
136
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 19 Policy
Table 43 Policy (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Outgoing
Metering
Out-of-profile
Action
Add
Select Send the packet to the mirror port to sent the packet to the mirror port.
Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the packet to the egress port.
Select Send the matching frames (broadcast or DLF, multicast, marked for
dropping or to be sent to the CPU) to the egress port to send the broadcast, multicast, DLF, marked-to-drop or CPU frames to the egress port.
Select Set the packet’s VLANID to set the VLAN ID of the packet with the value you configure in the VLANID field.
Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow(s) then set the actions to be taken on out-of-profile packets.
Select the action(s) to be performed for out-of-profile traffic.
Select Drop the packet to discard the out-of-profile traffic.
Select Change the DSCP Value to replace the DSCP field with the value specified in the Out-of-Profile DSCP field above.
Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to queue the frames that are marked to be dropped.
Click Add to inset the entry to the summary table below.
Index
Active
Name
Classifier(s)
Delete
Cancel
This field displays the policy index number. Click an index number to edit the policy.
This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
This field displays the name(s) of the classifier to which this policy applies.
Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
19.3 Policy Example
The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth and discard out-of-profile traffic on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier (refer to
).
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
137
Chapter 19 Policy
Figure 53 Policy Example
138
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 20
VLAN Stacking
This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN stacking on your switch. See the chapter on
VLANs for more background information on Virtual LAN
20.1 VLAN Stacking Overview
A service provider can use VLAN stacking to allow it to distinguish multiple customers
VLANs, even those with the same (customer-assigned) VLAN ID, within its network.
Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802.1Q tagged frames that enter the network. By tagging the tagged frames (“double-tagged” frames), the service provider can manage up to 4,094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4,094 customer VLANs. This allows a service provider to provide different service, based on specific VLANs, for many different customers.
A service provider’s customers may require a range of VLANs to handle multiple applications. A service provider’s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags on ports for these applications. The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer.
Therefore, there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers, so traffic from different customers is kept separate.
20.1.1 VLAN Stacking Example
In the following example figure, both A and B are Service Provider’s Network (SPN) customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively. Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group. The service provider can separate these two VLANs within its network by adding tag 37 to distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network.
139
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 20 VLAN Stacking
Figure 54 VLAN Stacking Example
140
20.2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles
Each port can have three VLAN stacking “roles”, Normal, Access Port and Tunnel Port (the latter is for Gigabit ports only).
• Select Normal for “regular” (non-VLAN stacking) IEEE 802.1Q frame switching.
• Select Access Port for ingress ports on the service provider's edge devices (1 and 2 in the
VLAN stacking example figure). The incoming frame is treated as "untagged", so a second VLAN tag (outer VLAN tag) can be added.
"
Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be disabled on a port where you choose
Normal or Access Port.
• Select Tunnel Port (available for Gigabit ports only) for egress ports at the edge of the service provider's network. All VLANs belonging to a customer can be aggregated into a single service provider's VLAN (using the outer VLAN tag defined by SP VID).
"
Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be enabled on a port where you choose
Tunnel.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 20 VLAN Stacking
20.3 VLAN Tag Format
A VLAN tag (service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE 802.1Q) consists of the following three fields.
Table 44 VLAN Tag Format
Type Priority VID
Type is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the frame carries IEEE 802.1Q tag information. SP TPID (Service Provider Tag Protocol
Identifier) is the service provider VLAN stacking tag type. Many vendors use 0x8100 or
0x9100.
TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) is the customer IEEE 802.1Q tag.
• If the VLAN stacking port role is Access Port, then the switch adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider's edge devices (1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure).
• If the VLAN stacking port role is Tunnel Port, then the switch only adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider's edge devices (1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure) that have an SP TPID different to the one configured on the switch. (If an incoming frame’s SP TPID is the same as the one configured on the switch, then the switch will not add the tag.)
Priority refers to the IEEE 802.1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize traffic based on the class of service (CoS) the customer has paid for.
• On the switch, configure priority level of inner IEEE 802.1Q tag in the Port Setup screen.
• "0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
VID is the VLAN ID. SP VID is the VID for the second (service provider’s) VLAN tag.
20.3.1 Frame Format
The frame format for an untagged Ethernet frame, a single-tagged 802.1Q frame (customer) and a “double-tagged” 802.1Q frame (service provider) is shown next.
Configure the fields as circled in the switch VLAN Stacking screen.
Table 45 Single and Double Tagged 802.11Q Frame Format
DA SA Len/
Etype
Data FCS Untagged
Ethernet frame
DA SA SPTPI
D
DA SA TPID Priorit y
Priority VID TPID Priorit y
VID Len/
Etype
VID Len/
Etype
Data FCS IEEE 802.1Q customer tagged frame
Data FCS Double-tagged frame
Table 46 IEEE 802.1Q Frame
DA Destination Address
SA Source Address
Priority
Len/
Etype
802.1p Priority
Length and type of
Ethernet frame
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
141
Chapter 20 VLAN Stacking
Table 46 IEEE 802.1Q Frame
(SP)TPID (Service Provider) Tag Protocol IDentifier Data
VID VLAN ID FCS
Frame data
Frame Check Sequence
20.4 Configuring VLAN Stacking
Click Advanced Application and then VLAN Stacking in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 55 VLAN Stacking
142
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 47 VLAN Stacking
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Port
Role
Select this checkbox to enable VLAN stacking on the switch.
SP TPID SP TPID is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates whether the frame carries IEEE 802.1Q tag information. Choose 0x8100 or 0x9100 from the drop-down list box or select Others and then enter a four-digit hexadecimal number from 0x0000 to
0xFFFF. 0x denotes a hexadecimal number. It does not have to be typed in the Others text field.
The port number identifies the port you are configuring.
Select Normal to have the switch ignore frames received (or transmitted) on this port with
VLAN stacking tags. Anything you configure in SPVID and Priority are ignored.
Select Access Port to have the switch add the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames received on this port. Select Access Port for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider's network.
Select Tunnel Port (available for Gigabit ports only) for egress ports at the edge of the service provider's network.
In order to support VLAN stacking on a port, the port must be able to allow frames of 1526
Bytes (1522 Bytes + 4 Bytes for the second tag) to pass through it.
SPVID SPVID is the service provider’s VLAN ID (the outer VLAN tag). Enter the service provider
ID (from 1 to 4094) for frames received on this port. See
background information on VLAN ID.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 20 VLAN Stacking
Table 47 VLAN Stacking (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Priority Select a number from the drop-down list box to configure the priority level of the outer tag.
"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
Apply
Cancel
Note: Configure the priority level of the inner IEEE 802.1Q tag in the Port
Setup screen.
Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
143
Chapter 20 VLAN Stacking
144
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 21
Multicast
This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features.
21.1 Multicast Overview
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender to 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender to everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network.
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a session-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Refer to RFC 1112 and
RFC 2236 for information on IGMP versions 1 and 2 respectively.
See
Section 21.3 on page 146 to configure multicast.
21.1.1 IP Multicast Addresses
In IPv4, a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts
(multicast group) in a different subnetwork. A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group, not individual receiving devices. IP addresses in the Class D range (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255) are used for IP multicasting. Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by
IANA for special purposes (see the IANA web site for more information).
21.1.2 IGMP Filtering
With IGMP filtering, you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join. This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services (such as content information distribution) based on service plans and types of subscription.
You can set the switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per-port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port.
21.1.3 IGMP Snooping
A layer-2 switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query, Report and Leave (IGMP version 2) packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership. It checks IGMP packets passing through it, picks out the group registration information, and configures multicasting accordingly.
145
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Multicast
Without IGMP snooping, multicast traffic is treated in the same manner as broadcast traffic, you can configure the switch to forward or discard unknown multicast group traffic. With
IGMP snooping, group multicast traffic is only forwarded to ports that are members of that group. IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic, allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your switch.
21.2 Multicast Status
Click Advanced Application > Multicast to display the screen as shown. This screen shows
the multicast group information. Refer to Section 21.1 on page 145 for more information on
multicast.
Figure 56 Multicast Status .
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 48 Multicast Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index
VID
Port
Multicast Group
This is the index number of the entry.
This field displays the multicast VLAN ID.
This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group.
This field displays IP multicast group addresses.
21.3 Multicast Setup
Click Advanced Application > Multicast to display the screen as shown. Use this screen to enable and configure multicast settings on the switch and apply IGMP profiles to ports.
See
Section 21.1 on page 145 for background information.
146
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Figure 57 Multicast
Chapter 21 Multicast
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 49 Multicast
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Snooping
Active
Leave
Timeout
Select Active to enable IGMP snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group
Host Timeout Specify the time (from 1 to 16,716,450) in seconds that elapses before the switch removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the host.
Enter an IGMP leave timeout value (from 1 to 16,716,450) in seconds. This defines how many seconds the switch waits before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received from a host.
802.1p Priority Select a priority level (0-7) to which the switch changes the priority in outgoing
IGMP control packets. Otherwise, select No-Change to not replace the priority.
IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to limit the IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join.
Unknown
Multicast Frame
Port
Immed. Leave
Specify the action to perform when the switch receives an unknown multicast frame. Select Drop to discard the frame(s). Select Flooding to send the frame(s) to the destination device.
This field displays the port number.
Select this option to set the switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port.
Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port.
Group Limited
IGMP Filtering
Profile
Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join.
Max Group Num.
Select this option and enter a number to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join. Once a port is registered in the specified number of multicast groups, any new IGMP join report frame(s) is dropped on this port.
Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
147
Chapter 21 Multicast
Table 49 Multicast (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Querier
Mode
Apply
Cancel
This field is applicable on the Ethernet ports.
The switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router (or server). The switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port.
Select Auto to have the switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP query packets.
Select Fixed to have the switch always use the port as an IGMP query port. Select this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port.
Select Edge to stop the switch from using the port as an IGMP query port. The switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port.
The switch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port.
Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
21.4 IGMP Filtering Profile
IGMP filter profiles allow you to control access to IGMP multicast groups. This allows you to have a service available to a specific IGMP multicast group. You can configure an IGMP filter profile for an IGMP multicast group that has access to a service (like a SIP server for example). Within a profile, configure an IGMP filter to specify the multicast IP address ranges. Then assign the IGMP filter profile to the ports (in the Multicast screen) that are allowed to use the service.
Click Advanced Application and Multicast in the navigation panel. Click the IGMP
Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown.
Figure 58 Multicast > IGMP Filtering Profile
148
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Multicast
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 50 Multicast > IGMP Filtering Profile
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Profile Name
Start Address
End Address
Add
Clear
Profile Name
Start Address
End Address
Delete
Cancel
Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes.
To configure additional rule(s) for a profile that you have already added, enter the profile name and specify a different IP multicast address range.
Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile.
Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile.
If you want to add a single multicast IP address, enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields.
Click Add to save the settings to the switch.
Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.
This field displays the descriptive name of the profile.
This field displays the start of the multicast address range.
This field displays the end of the multicast address range.
To delete the profile(s) and all the accompanying rules, select the profile(s) that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column, then click the Delete button.
To delete a rule(s) from a profile, select the rule(s) that you want to remove in the
Delete Rule column, then click the Delete button.
Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile/Delete Rule check boxes.
21.5 MVR Overview
Multicast VLAN Registration is designed for applications (such as Media-on-Demand (MoD)) that use multicast traffic across a service provider network.
MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network. While isolated in different subscriber VLANs, connected devices can subscriber to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN. This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management.
You must enable IGMP snooping to use MVR. However, MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR. Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping.
The following figure shows a network example. The subscriber VLAN (1, 2 and 3) information is hidden from the streaming media server, S. In addition, the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the switch and S.
Figure 59 MVR Network Example
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
149
Chapter 21 Multicast
21.5.1 Types of MVR Ports
In MVR, a source port is a port on the switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic. Once configured, the switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group.
21.5.2 MVR Modes
You can set your switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode.
In dynamic mode, the switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices
(such as multicast routers or servers) in the multicast VLAN. This allows the multicast devices to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports.
In compatible mode, the switch does not send any IGMP reports. In this case, you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN.
21.5.3 How MVR Works
The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device (such as a computer) in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server, S, via the switch. Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the switch.
When the subscriber selects a television channel, computer A sends an IGMP report to the switch to join the appropriate multicast group. If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the switch, an entry is created in the forwarding table on the switch. This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic.
When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer, an IGMP leave message is sent to the switch to leave the multicast group. The switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port (in this case, a DSL port on the switch). If there is another subscriber device connected to this port in the same subscriber VLAN, the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination for the multicast traffic. Otherwise, the switch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table.
Figure 60 MVR Multicast Television Example
150
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Multicast
21.6 General MVR Configuration
Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port(s) and a source port for each multicast VLAN. Click Advanced Application and Multicast in the navigation panel. Click the Multicast Setting link and then the MVR link to display the screen as shown next.
See
Section 21.5 on page 149 for background information.
"
You can create up to three multicast VLANs and up to 266 multicast rules on the switch.
"
Your switch automatically creates a static VLAN (with the same VID) when you create a multicast VLAN in this screen.
Figure 61 MVR
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
151
Chapter 21 Multicast
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 51 MVR
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Name
Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
Enter the VLAN ID (1 to 4094) of the multicast VLAN. Multicast VLAN
ID
802.1p Priority
Mode
Port
Source Port
Receiver Port
None
Tagging
Add
Select a priority level (0-7) with which the switch replaces the priority in outgoing
IGMP control packets (belonging to this multicast VLAN).
Specify the MVR mode on the switch. Choices are Dynamic and Compatible.
Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast
VLAN.
Select Compatible to set the switch not to send IGMP reports.
This field displays the port number on the switch.
This field is applicable for Ethernet ports.
Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast traffic.
Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic.
Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR. No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port.
Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted.
Click Add to save the settings.
VLAN
Active
Name
Mode
Source Port
Receiver Port
802.1p
Delete
Cancel
This field displays the multicast VLAN ID.
This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not.
This field displays the descriptive name for this setting.
This field displays the MVR mode.
This field displays the source port number(s).
This field displays the receiver port number(s).
This field displays the priority with which the switch replaces the priority in outgoing
IGMP control packets (belonging to this multicast VLAN).
To delete the group(s) and all the accompanying rules, select the group(s) that you want to remove in the Delete column, then click the Delete button.
Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
21.7 MVR Group Configuration
All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this multicast group.
See
Section 21.5 on page 149 for background information.
152
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Multicast
Configure MVR IP multicast group address(es) in the Group Configuration screen. Click
Group Configuration in the MVR screen.
"
A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN. However, IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap.
Figure 62 MVR > Group Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 52 MVR > Group Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Multicast
VLAN ID
Name
Select a multicast VLAN ID (that you configured in the MVR screen) from the dropdown list box.
Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes.
Start Address Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation.
Refer to
Section 21.1.1 on page 145 for more information on IP multicast addresses.
End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation.
Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one
IP address for a multicast group.
Refer to
Section 21.1.1 on page 145 for more information on IP multicast addresses.
Add Click Add to save the settings.
MVLAN
Name
This field displays the multicast VLAN ID.
This field displays the descriptive name for this setting.
Start Address This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group.
End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group.
Select Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry(ies) from the table.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
153
Chapter 21 Multicast
21.7.1 MVR Configuration Example
The following figure shows a network example where ports 1, 2 and 3 on the switch belong to
VLAN 1. In addition, port 17 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic (the News and Movie channels) from the remote streaming media server, S. Computers
A, B and C in VLAN are able to receive the traffic.
Figure 63 MVR Configuration Example
To configure the MVR settings on the switch, create a multicast group in the MVR screen and set the receiver and source ports.
Figure 64 MVR Configuration Example
154
To set the switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers, configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen. The following figure shows an example where two multicast groups (News and Movie) are configured for the multicast VLAN 200.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Figure 65 MVR Group Configuration Example
Chapter 21 Multicast
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
155
Chapter 21 Multicast
156
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 22
Differentiated Services
This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services (DiffServ) on the switch.
22.1 DiffServ Overview
Quality of Service (QoS) is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet types.
DiffServ is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific perhop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.
22.1.1 DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service (ToS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field.
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-
DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
Figure 66 DiffServ: Differentiated Service Field
DSCP (6 bits) DS (2 bits)
The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies.
22.1.2 DiffServ Network Example
The following figure depicts a simple DiffServ network consisting of a group of contiguous
DiffServ-compliant network devices.
157
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Differentiated Services
Figure 67 DiffServ Network Example
Switch A marks traffic flowing into the network based on the configured marking rules.
Intermediary network devices 1 and 2 allocate network resources (such as bandwidth) by mapping the DSCP values and the associated policies.
22.2 Activating DiffServ
Activate DiffServ to allow the switch to enable DiffServ and apply marking rules and
IEEE802.1p priority mapping on the selected port(s).
Click Advanced Application > DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 68 DiffServ
158
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 53 DiffServ
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Default DSCP Enter the default DSCP value (between 0 to 63) to use if no marking rule is configured for a traffic type.
Port
Active
Select this option to enable DiffServ on the switch.
This field displays the index number of a port on the switch.
Select this option to apply the default DSCP value you set in the Default DSCP field on a port.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save the changes.
Click Cancel to start configuring this screen again.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Differentiated Services
22.3 DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p Priority Setting
You can configure the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) to IEEE802.1p mapping to allow the switch to prioritize all traffic based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ-to-
IEEE802.1p mapping table.
The following table shows the default DSCP-to-IEEE802.1P mapping.
Table 54 Default DSCP-IEEE802.1p Mapping
DSCP
VALUE
0 – 7 8 – 15 16 – 23 24 – 31 32 – 39 40 – 47 48 – 55 56 – 63
IEEE802.1P
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
22.3.1 Configuring DSCP Setting
To change the DSCP-IEEE 802.1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 69 DiffServ > DSCP Setting
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 55 DiffServ > DSCP Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
0 … 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number.
To set the IEEE802.1p priority mapping, select the priority level from the drop-down list box.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes and start configuring the screen again.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
159
Chapter 22 Differentiated Services
160
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
P
ART
IV
Routing Protocol
161
162
C H A P T E R 23
Static Route
This chapter shows you how to configure static routes.
23.1 Configuring Static Route
Static routes tell the switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP/IP parameters manually.
Click Routing Protocol > Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 70 Static Routing
The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route.
Table 56 Static Routing
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Name
Destination IP
Address
This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.
Enter a descriptive name for this route. This is for identification purpose only.
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID.
Enter the subnet mask for this destination.
IP Subnet
Mask
Gateway IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your switch that will forward the packet to the destination. The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your switch.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
163
Chapter 23 Static Route
Table 56 Static Routing (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Metric
Add
Cancel
The metric represents the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks. Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise, but it must be between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number.
Click Add to insert a new static route.
Click Cancel to reset the above fields to your previous configuration.
Index
Active
Name
Destination
Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Address
Metric
Delete
Cancel
This field displays the index number of the route. Click a number to edit the static route entry.
This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated.
This field displays the descriptive name for this route. This is for identification purpose only.
This field displays the IP network address of the final destination.
This field displays the subnet mask for this destination.
This field displays the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your switch that will forward the packet to the destination.
This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes.
Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
164
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 24
DHCP Relay
This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature.
24.1 DHCP Overview
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual computers to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the switch to relay client DHCP requests to a DHCP server and the server’s responses back to the clients.
24.1.1 DHCP Relay Agent Information
The switch can add information to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server. This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests. You can also specify additional information for the switch to add to the client DHCP requests that it relays to the DHCP server. Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details.
The DHCP relay agent information feature adds an Agent Information field to the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that the switch relays to a DHCP server. The following lists the DHCP relay agent option 82 information that the switch sends to the DHCP server:
• Slot ID (1 byte)
• Port ID (1 byte)
• VLAN ID (2 bytes)
• System name (up to 32 bytes, this is optional)
24.2 Configuring DHCP Relay
Click Routing Protocol > DHCP Relay in the navigation panel. Use this screen to enable
DHCP relay on the switch and specify the IP address(es) of the DHCP server(s).
165
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 24 DHCP Relay
Figure 71 DHCP Relay
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 57 DHCP Relay
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Remote DHCP
Server 1.. 3
Relay Agent
Information
Information
Apply
Cancel
Select this check box to enable DHCP relay settings.
Enter the IP address(es) of the DHCP server(s).
Select the Option 82 check box to have the switch add information (slot number, port number and VLAN ID) to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
This read-only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen.
Select the check box for the switch to add the system name to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
Click Apply to save the changes.
Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configurations.
166
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
P
ART
V
Management
167
168
C H A P T E R 25
Maintenance
This chapter explains how to configure the maintenance screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration files.
25.1 The Maintenance Screen
The maintenance screens can allow you to upload new firmware (to the switch), manage configuration, reset to factory defaults and restart your switch.
Click Management > Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the screen as shown next.
Figure 72 Maintenance
The following table describes the links in this screen.
Table 58 Maintenance
LINK DESCRIPTION
Remote Device
Upgrade
Access this screen to perform remote firmware upgrade on the connected nonmanageble CPE device(s).
VDSL Chip Reset Access this screen to reset the VDSL chip(s) on this switch.
Remote Device
Reset
Access this screen to reset the VDSL link(s) to the CPE device(s).
Firmware Upgrade Access this screen to upload a new firmware to this switch.
Restore
Configuration
Access this screen to upload a previously saved configuration file to the switch.
Backup
Configuration
Access this screen to back up the current switch configuration.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
169
Chapter 25 Maintenance
Table 58 Maintenance (continued)
LINK DESCRIPTION
Load Factory
Default
Reboot System
Click this button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the switch to its factory defaults.
You may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1).
Click this button to restart the switch without turning the power off. This does not affect the switch's configuration.
25.2 Load Factory Default
Follow the steps below to reset the switch back to the factory defaults.
1 In the Maintenance screen, click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Defaults to clear all switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults. The following message appears.
Figure 73 Load Factory Default: Conformation
2 Click OK to display the screen shown next.
Figure 74 Load Factory Default: Start
3 Click OK to begin resetting all switch configurations to the factory defaults and then wait for the switch to restart. This takes up to two minutes. If you want to access the switch web configurator again, you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default switch IP address (192.168.1.1).
25.3 Reboot System
Reboot System allows you to restart the switch without physically turning the power off.
Follow the steps below to reboot the switch.
1 In the Maintenance screen, click the Click Here button next to Reboot System to display the next screen.
Figure 75 Reboot System: Confirmation
170
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 25 Maintenance
2 Click OK to display the screen shown next.
Figure 76 Reboot System: Start
3 Click OK again and then wait for the switch to restart. This takes up to two minutes.
This does not affect the switch’s configuration.
25.4 Remote Device Upgrade
The switch allows you to perform remote firmware upgrade on the connected CPE device(s).
Click Management and Maintenance, then click the Click Here link next to Remote Device
Upgrade to display the screen as shown next.
"
Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage the device.
Figure 77 Maintenance: Remote Device Upgrade
Follow the steps below to perform remote firmware upgrade on the CPE devices connected to the switch.
1 Download the latest firmware for the CPE device from www.zyxel.com and save it on a computer connected to the switch.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
171
Chapter 25 Maintenance
2 In the Remote Device Upgrade screen, select the VDSL line(s) of the CPE device(s) to which you want to upgrade the firmware. You can select multiple CPE devices by holding down the [SHIFT] or [CTRL] key and clicking the mouse at the same time.
3 Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the switch in the
File Path text box or click Browse to locate it.
4 After you have specified the file, click Upgrade.
25.5 VDSL Chip Reset
There are four VDSL chips in the switch and each VDSL chip controls four VDSL ports. You can reset the VDSL chip(s) using the VDSL Chip Reset screen.
"
Resetting VDSL chip(s) disconnects the associated VDSL line(s).
"
Resetting the VDSL chip(s) does NOT restart the switch.
Follow the steps below to reset VDSL chips in the switch.
1 Access the VDSL Chip Reset screen from the Maintenance screen.
Figure 78 Maintenance: VDSL Chip Reset
2 Select the VDSL chips you want to reset in the list box. You can select multiple entries by holding down the [SHIFT] or [CTRL] key.
3 Click Reset to reset the selected VDSL chip(s).
25.6 Remote Device Reset
Use the Remote Device Reset screen to reset the VDSL line. The switch re-negotiates the
VDSL link to the remote CPE device.
172
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 25 Maintenance
1 Access the Remote Device Reset screen from the Maintenance screen.
Figure 79 Maintenance: Remote Device Reset
2 Select the VDSL line(s) you want to reset in the list box. You can select multiple entries by holding down the [SHIFT] or [CTRL] key.
3 Click Reset to reset the selected VDSL line(s).
"
Resetting the VDSL lines does NOT restart the switch.
25.7 Firmware Upgrade
"
You can only upload the firmware of the same VDSL standard as your Switch.
Use the show hardware-version command to check whether your device
is a VDSL1 switch (100100, or 10050) or VDSL2 switch (5030). See Chapter
1 on page 31 and
Chapter 32 on page 209 for more information.
Table 59 Switch Hardware Version
HARDWARE VERSION STANDARD
100100
10050
5030
VDSL1
VDSL1
VDSL2
Make sure you have downloaded (and unzipped) the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device.
"
Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device.
173
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 25 Maintenance
From the Maintenance screen, display the Firmware Upgrade screen as shown next.
"
Firmware upgrade using the web configurator saves the new firmware to ras-
0.
Figure 80 Firmware Upgrade
Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the switch in the File
Path text box or click Browse to locate it. After you have specified the file, click Upgrade.
After the firmware upgrade process is complete, see the System Info screen to verify your current firmware version number.
25.8 Restore a Configuration File
Restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the switch using the Restore
Configuration screen.
Figure 81 Restore Configuration
Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to display the Choose File screen (below) from which you can locate it.
After you have specified the file, click Restore. "config" is the name of the configuration file on the switch, so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen.
25.9 Backing Up a Configuration File
Backing up your switch configurations allows you to create various “snap shots” of your device from which you may restore at a later date.
174
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 25 Maintenance
Back up your current switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen.
Figure 82 Backup Configuration
Follow the steps below to back up the current switch configuration to your computer in this screen.
1 Click Backup.
2 Click Save to display the Save As screen.
3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop-down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box. Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer.
25.10 FTP Command Line
This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the switch using
FTP commands. First, understand the filename conventions.
25.10.1 Filename Conventions
The configuration file (also known as the romfile or ROM) contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password, switch setup, IP Setup, etc.. Once you have customized the switch's settings, they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing.
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the “ras” file) is the system firmware and has a “bin” filename extension.
Table 60 Filename Conventions
FILE TYPE
INTERNAL
NAME
EXTERNA
L NAME
DESCRIPTION
Configuration File config
Firmware ras *.bin
This is the configuration filename on the switch.
Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system, including your switch configurations, system-related data (including the default password), the error log and the trace log.
This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the switch.
25.10.1.1 Example FTP Commands ftp> put firmware.bin ras
This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file "firmware.bin" to the switch.
ftp> get config config.cfg
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
175
176
Chapter 25 Maintenance
This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called “config.cfg” on your computer.
If your (T)FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source, you will need to rename them as the switch only recognizes “config” and “ras”. Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use.
"
Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device.
25.10.2 FTP Command Line Procedure
1 Launch the FTP client on your computer.
2 Enter open , followed by a space and the IP address of your switch.
3 Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username.
4 Enter your password as requested (the default is “1234”).
5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary.
6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the switch, for example, put firmware.bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer (firmware.bin) to the switch and renames it to “ras”. Similarly, put config.cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer (config.cfg) to the switch and renames it to
“config”. Likewise get config config.cfg
transfers the configuration file on the
switch to your computer and renames it “config.cfg.” See Table 60 on page 175 for more
information on filename conventions.
7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt.
25.10.3 GUI-based FTP Clients
The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI-based FTP clients.
General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Host Address
Login Type
Transfer Type
Enter the address of the host server.
Anonymous.
This is when a user I.D. and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access. Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option.
Normal.
The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login.
Transfer files in either ASCII (plain text format) or in binary mode.
Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode.
Specify the default remote directory (path).
Initial Remote
Directory
Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory (path).
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 25 Maintenance
25.10.4 FTP Restrictions
FTP will not work when:
• FTP service is disabled in the Access Control screen.
• The IP address(es) in the Secured Client Set in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the switch will disconnect the Telnet session immediately.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
177
Chapter 25 Maintenance
178
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 26
Access Control
This chapter describes how to control access to the switch.
26.1 Access Control Overview
The console port and FTP are allowed one session each, Telnet and SSH share four sessions, up to five web management sessions (five different usernames and passwords) and/or limitless
SNMP access control sessions are allowed.
Table 61 Access Control Overview
Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP
Number of concurrent sessions allowed
1 SSH and Telnet share 4 sessions.
1 5 No limit
When multiple login is disabled and there is already a console port session, you cannot telnet to the switch. The following error message displays.
Connection to host lost.
C:\>
If you disable multiple login while another administrator is accessing the switch via telnet, the switch will immediately log out the administrator and disconnect the telnet session. The following error message displays. multi-login is disabled, please exit immediately!!
Connection to host lost.
C:\>
26.2 The Access Control Main Screen
Click Management > Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown. Use these links to configure remote management options and create user accounts on the switch.
179
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 26 Access Control
Figure 83 Access Control
26.3 About SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol used to manage and monitor TCP/IP-based devices. SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system (NMS) and a network element (NE). A manager station can manage and monitor the switch through the network via SNMP version one (SNMPv1) and/or SNMP version 2c. The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation. SNMP is only available if TCP/IP is configured.
Figure 84 SNMP Management Model
180
An SNMP managed network consists of two main components: agents and a manager.
An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed switch (this device). An agent translates the local management information from the managed switch into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices.
The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a switch. Examples of variables include such as number of packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects.
SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 26 Access Control
Table 62 SNMP Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Get
GetNext
Set
Trap
Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.
Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.
Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.
Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.
26.3.1 Supported MIBs
MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance.
The switch supports the following MIBs:
• SNMP MIB II (RFC 1213)
• RFC 1155 SMI
• RFC 1157 SNMP v1
• RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs
• RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs
• RFC 1757 RMON
• RFC 2233 ifVHCPacketGroup
• RFC 2674 SNMPv2, SNMPv2c
• RFC 2925 PING-MIB and TRACEROUTE-MIB
• RFC 3728 VDSL line MIB
• SNMPv2, SNMPv2c or later version, compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP,
RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP, RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP
26.3.2 SNMP Traps
The switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs. SNMP traps supported are outlined in the following table.
Table 63 SNMP Traps
OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
SNMPv2 Trap
Cold Start This trap is sent when the switch is turned on.
WarmStart linkDown linkUp authenticationFailure
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.
1
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.
2
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.
3
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.
4
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.
5
This trap is sent when the switch restarts.
This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down.
This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up.
This trap is sent when an SNMP request comes from non-authenticated hosts.
RFC 1493 Traps
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
181
Chapter 26 Access Control
Table 63 SNMP Traps (continued)
OBJECT LABEL newRoot topologyChange
OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION
1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes.
1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.2 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes.
26.3.3 Configuring SNMP
From the Access Control screen, display the SNMP screen. You can click Access Control to go back to the Access Control screen.
Figure 85 Access Control: SNMP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 64 Access Control: SNMP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Get Community Enter the get community, which is the password for the incoming Get- and GetNext- requests from the management station.
Set Community Enter the set community, which is the password for incoming Set- requests from the management station.
Trap Community Enter the trap community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager.
Trap Destination Enter the IP addresses of up to four stations to send your SNMP traps to.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
26.4 Setting Up Login Accounts
Up to five people (one administrator and four non-administrators) may access the switch via web configurator at any one time.
• An administrator is someone who can both view and configure switch changes. The username for the Administrator is always admin. The default administrator password is
1234.
182
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 26 Access Control
"
It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password
(1234).
• A non-administrator (username is something other than admin) is someone who can view but not configure switch settings.
Click Access Control from the navigation panel and then click Logins from this screen.
Figure 86 Access Control: Logins
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 65 Access Control: Logins
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Administrator
This is the default administrator account with the “admin” user name. You cannot change the default administrator user name. Only the administrator has read/write access.
Old Password Type the existing system password (1234 is the default password when shipped).
New Password Enter your new system password.
Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation
Edit Logins
You may configure passwords for up to four users. These people have read-only access.
User Name
Password
Set a user name (up to 30 characters long).
Enter your new system password.
Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.
Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
183
Chapter 26 Access Control
26.5 SSH Overview
Unlike Telnet or FTP, which transmit data in clear text, SSH (Secure Shell) is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network.
Figure 87 SSH Communication Example
26.6 How SSH works
The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts.
Figure 88 How SSH Works
184
1 Host Identification
The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server. The server identifies itself with a host key. The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server.
The client automatically saves any new server public keys. In subsequent connections, the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer.
2 Encryption Method
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 26 Access Control
Once the identification is verified, both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use.
3 Authentication and Data Transmission
After the identification is verified and data encryption activated, a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server. The client then sends its authentication information (user name and password) to the server to log in to the server.
26.7 SSH Implementation on the Switch
Your switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods
(DES, 3DES and Blowfish). The SSH server is implemented on the switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22.
26.7.1 Requirements for Using SSH
You must install an SSH client program on a client computer (Windows or Linux operating system) that is used to connect to the switch over SSH.
26.7.2 SSH Login Example
You can use an SSH client program to access the switch. The following figure shows an example using a text-based SSH client program. Refer to the documentation that comes with your SSH program for information on using it.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
185
Chapter 26 Access Control
Figure 89 SSH Login Example
C:\>ssh2 [email protected]
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
@ WARNING: HOST IDENTIFICATION HAS CHANGED! @
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT SOMEONE IS DOING SOMETHING NASTY!
Someone could be eavesdropping on you right now (man-in-the-middle attack)!
It is also possible that the host key has just been changed.
Please contact your system administrator.
Add correct host key to "C:/Documents and Settings/Administrator/Application
Data/SSH/hostkeys/key_22_192.168.1.1.pub" to get rid of this message.
Received server key's fingerprint: xigil-gidot-homug-duzab-tocyh-pamybronep-tisaf-hebip-gokeb-goxix You can get a public key's fingerprint by running % ssh-keygen -F publickey.pub
on the keyfile. Agent forwarding is disabled to avoid attacks by corrupted servers. X11 forwarding is disabled to avoid attacks by corrupted servers.
Are you sure you want to continue connecting (yes/no)? yes
Do you want to change the host key on disk (yes/no)? yes
Agent forwarding re-enabled.
X11 forwarding re-enabled.
Host key saved to C:/Documents and Settings/Administrator/Application Data/
SSH/hostkeys/key_22_192.168.1.1.pub host key for 192.168.1.1, accepted by
Administrator Thu May 12 2005 09:52:21 admin's password:
Authentication successful.
Copyright (c) 1994 - 2005 ZyXEL Communications Corp.
sysname>
26.8 Introduction to HTTPS
HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, or HTTP over SSL) is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an applicationlevel protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality (an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data), authentication (one party can identify the other party) and data integrity (you know if data has been changed).
It relies upon certificates, public keys, and private keys.
HTTPS on the switch is used so that you may securely access the switch using the web configurator. The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server (the switch) must always authenticate itself to the SSL client (the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the switch), whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so. Authenticating client certificates is optional and if selected means the SSLclient must send the switch a certificate. You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on the switch.
Please refer to the following figure.
1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL-aware web browser go to port 443 (by default) on the switch’s WS (web server).
186
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 26 Access Control
2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 (by default) on the switch’s
WS (web server).
Figure 90 HTTPS Implementation
"
If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen, then the switch blocks all HTTP connection attempts.
26.9 HTTPS Example
If you haven’t changed the default HTTPS port on the switch, then in your browser enter
“https://switch IP Address/” as the web site address where “switch IP Address” is the IP address or domain name of the switch you wish to access.
26.9.1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages
When you attempt to access the switch HTTPS server, a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust the server certificate. Click View Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the switch.
You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer. Select Yes to proceed to the web configurator login screen; if you select No, then web configurator access is blocked.
Figure 91 Security Alert Dialog Box (Internet Explorer)
187
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 26 Access Control
26.9.2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages
When you attempt to access the switch HTTPS server, a Website Certified by an Unknown
Authority screen pops up asking if you trust the server certificate. Click Examine Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the switch.
If Accept this certificate temporarily for this session is selected, then click OK to continue in Netscape.
Select Accept this certificate permanently to import the switch’s certificate into the SSL client.
Figure 92 Security Certificate 1 (Netscape)
Figure 93 Security Certificate 2 (Netscape)
26.9.3 The Main Screen
After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password, the switch main screen appears. The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection.
188
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Figure 94 Example: Lock Denoting a Secure Connection
Chapter 26 Access Control
26.10 Service Access Control
Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the switch.
You may also change the default service port and configure “trusted computer(s)” for each service in the Remote Management screen (discussed later). Click Access Control to go back to the main Access Control screen.
Figure 95 Access Control: Service Access Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 66 Access Control: Service Access Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Services
Active
Services you may use to access the switch are listed here.
Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the switch.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
189
Chapter 26 Access Control
Table 66 Access Control: Service Access Control (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Service Port For Telnet, SSH, FTP, HTTP or HTTPS services, you may change the default service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field. If you change the default port number then you will have to let people (who wish to use the service) know the new port number for that service.
Timeout Type how many minutes a management session (via the web configurator) can be left idle before the session times out. After it times out you have to log in with your password again. Very long idle timeouts may have security risks.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
26.11 Remote Management
From the Access Control screen, display the Remote Management screen as shown next.
You can specify a group of one or more “trusted computers” from which an administrator may use a service to manage the switch. Click Access Control to return to the Access Control screen.
Figure 96 Access Control: Remote Management
190
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 67 Access Control: Remote Management
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Entry
Active
Start Address
End Address
This is the client set index number. A “client set” is a group of one or more “trusted computers” from which an administrator may use a service to manage the switch.
Select this check box to activate this secured client set. Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it.
Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this switch.
The switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here. The switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match.
Select services that may be used for managing the switch from the specified trusted computers.
Telnet/FTP/
Web/ICMP/
SNMP/SSH/
HTTPS
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 27
Diagnostic
This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen.
27.1 Diagnostic
Click Management > Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen. Use this screen to check system logs, reset the system or ping IP addresses.
Figure 97 Diagnostic
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 68 Diagnostic
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Log
IP Ping
Port Test
Click Display to display a log of events in the multi-line text box.
Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry.
Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection.
Click Ping to have the switch ping the IP address (in the field to the left).
From the Port drop-down list box, select a port number and click Internal Test to perform internal loopback test or click External Test (on VDSL ports) to perform loopback test to the remote devices.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
191
Chapter 27 Diagnostic
192
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 28
Syslog
This chapter explains the syslog screens.
28.1 Syslog Overview
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server.
Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level.
The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels.
Table 69 Syslog Severity Levels
CODE SEVERITY
Emergency: The system is unusable.
Alert: Action must be taken immediately.
Critical: The system condition is critical.
Error: There is an error condition on the system.
Warning: There is a warning condition on the system.
Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system.
Informational: The syslog contains an informational message.
Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes.
28.2 Syslog Setup
Click Management and then Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen. The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server. Use this screen to configure the device’s system logging settings.
193
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 28 Syslog
Figure 98 Syslog Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 70 Syslog
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Syslog
Logging Type
Active
Facility
Select Active to turn on syslog (system logging) and then configure the syslog setting
This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate.
Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category.
The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server.
Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details.
28.3 Syslog Server Setup
Click Management and then Syslog in the navigation panel to display the Syslog Setup screen. Click the Syslog Server Setup link to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a list of external syslog servers.
194
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 28 Syslog
Figure 99 Syslog Server Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 71 Syslog Server Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Server Address
Log Level
Add
Cancel
Clear
Index
Active
IP Address
Log Level
Delete
Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server. Clear the check box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it (you can edit the entry later).
Enter the IP address of the syslog server.
Select the severity level(s) of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog server. The lower the number, the more critical the logs are.
Click Add to save your changes back to the device. The entry displays in the table below.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults.
This is the index number of a syslog server entry. Click this number to edit the entry.
This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server. No displays if the device is not to send logs to the syslog server.
This field displays the IP address of the syslog server.
This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server.
Select an entry’s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
195
Chapter 28 Syslog
196
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 29
Cluster Management
This chapter introduces cluster management.
29.1 Cluster Management Overview
Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one switch, called the cluster manager. The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another.
Table 72 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications
Maximum number of cluster members
24
Cluster Member Models
Cluster Manager
Cluster Members
Must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation.
The switch through which you manage the cluster member switches.
The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch.
In the following example, switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members.
Figure 100 Clustering Application Example
197
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 29 Cluster Management
29.2 Cluster Management Status
Click Management > Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following screen.
"
A cluster can only have one manager.
Figure 101 Cluster Management Status
198
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 73 Cluster Management Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status
Manager
The Number of
Member
Index
MacAddr
Name
Model
Status
This field displays the role of this switch within the cluster.
Manager
Member (you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager)
None (neither a manager nor a member of a cluster)
This field displays the cluster manager switch’s hardware MAC address.
This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster. The following fields describe the cluster member switches.
You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch. Each number in the Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch’s web
configurator (see Figure 102 on page 199 ).
This is the cluster member switch’s hardware MAC address.
This is the cluster member switch’s System Name.
This field displays the model name.
This field displays:
Online (the cluster member switch is accessible)
Error (for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the manager and so left the member list, etc.)
Offline (the switch is disconnected - Offline shows approximately 1.5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down)
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 29 Cluster Management
29.2.1 Cluster Member Switch Management
Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then click on an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch's web configurator home page. This cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that you'd see if you accessed it directly are different.
Figure 102 Cluster Management: Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen
29.2.1.1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch
You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as shown in the following example.
Figure 103 Example: Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch
C:\>ftp 192.168.1.1
Connected to 192.168.1.1.
220 FTP version 1.0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00:47:52 1970
User (192.168.1.1:(none)): admin
331 Enter PASS command
Password:
230 Logged in ftp> ls
200 Port command okay
150 Opening data connection for LIST
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 1459070 Jul 01 12:00 ras
-rw-rw-rw- 1 owner group 49152 Jul 01 12:00 config
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-00-13-49-00-00-01
-rw-rw-rw- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 config-00-13-49-00-00-01
226 File sent OK ftp: 297 bytes received in 0.01Seconds 19.80Kbytes/sec.
ftp> bin
200 Type I OK ftp> put 360AIH0.bin fw-00-13-49-00-00-01
200 Port command okay
150 Opening data connection for STOR fw-00-13-49-00-00-01
226 File received OK ftp: 262144 bytes sent in 0.63Seconds 415.44Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
199
Chapter 29 Cluster Management
The following table explains some of the FTP parameters.
Table 74 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example
FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
User
Password ls
360AIH0.bin
fw-00-13-49-00-00-01
Enter “admin”.
The web configurator password default is 1234.
Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch’s firmware and configuration file.
This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member switch.
This is the cluster member switch’s firmware name as seen in the cluster manager switch.
config-00-13-49-00-00-01 This is the cluster member switch’s configuration file name as seen in the cluster manager switch.
29.3 Configuring Cluster Management
Click Configuration from the Cluster Management screen to display the next screen.
Refer to Section 29.1 on page 197 for more information.
Figure 104 Clustering Management Configuration
200
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 29 Cluster Management
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 75 Clustering Management Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Clustering Manager
Active
Name
VID
Cancel
Select Active to have this switch become the cluster manager switch. A cluster can only have one manager. Other (directly connected) switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list. If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager, then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management
Status screen and a warning icon ( ) appears in the member summary list below.
Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager. You may use up to 32 printable characters (spaces are allowed).
This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the switch is set to 802.1Q VLAN.
All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster. Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list. This field is ignored if the Clustering
Manager is using Port-based VLAN.
Apply
Cancel
Clustering
Candidate
List
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this part of the screen afresh.
The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members.
Password
A list of suitable candidates found by auto-discovery is shown here. The switches must be directly connected. Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list.
Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list.
Each cluster member’s password is its web configurator password. Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password. If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards, then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager. Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon ( ) appears in the member summary list below.
If multiple devices have the same password then hold [SHIFT] and click those switches to select them. Then enter their common web configurator password.
Add
Cancel
Click Add to save this part of the screen to the switch.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this part of the screen afresh.
Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto-discovery again to list potential cluster members.
The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured.
Index
MacAddr
Name
Model
Remove
This is the index number of a cluster member switch.
This is the cluster member switch’s hardware MAC address.
This is the cluster member switch’s System Name.
This is the cluster member switch’s model name.
Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster member switch from the cluster.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this part of the screen afresh.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
201
Chapter 29 Cluster Management
202
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 30
MAC Table
This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen.
30.1 MAC Table Overview
The MAC Table screen (a MAC table is also known as a filtering database) shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the switch’s ports. It shows what device MAC address, belonging to what VLAN group (if any) is forwarded to which port(s) and whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by the switch) or static (manually entered in the Static MAC
Forwarding screen).
The switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames. See the following figure.
1 The switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came.
2 The switch checks to see if the frame's destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC table.
• If the switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, then it forwards the frame to that port.
• If the switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address, then the frame is flooded to all ports. Too much port flooding leads to network congestion.
• If the switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on, then it filters the frame.
Figure 105 MAC Table Flowchart
203
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 30 MAC Table
30.2 Viewing the MAC Table
Click Management > MAC Table in the navigation panel.
"
Click a button in the Sort by field to display the MAC address table entries.
Figure 106 MAC Table
204
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 76 MAC Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Sort by
MAC
Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that button type. The information is then displayed in the summary table below.
Click this button to display and arrange the data according to MAC address.
VID
Port
Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group.
Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number.
Index This is the incoming frame index number.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came.
VID
Port
Type
This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs.
This is the port from which the above MAC address was learned.
This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by the switch) or static
(manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 31
ARP Table
This chapter introduces ARP table.
31.1 ARP Table Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on the local area network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
31.1.1 How ARP Works
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the switch, the switch's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and, if it finds the address, sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the
LAN. The switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the switch puts all ones in the target MAC field (FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied.
31.2 Viewing the ARP Table
Click Management > ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use the ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s).
205
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 31 ARP Table
Figure 107 ARP Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 77 ARP Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index
IP Address
This is the ARP Table entry number.
This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a switch port with corresponding MAC address below.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with corresponding IP address above.
Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by the switch) or static
(manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).
206
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
P
ART
VII
Commands,
Troubleshooting and Specifications
Introducing the Commands (209)
IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands (259)
207
208
C H A P T E R 32
Introducing the Commands
This chapter introduces the commands and gives a summary of commands available.
32.1 Overview
In addition to the web configurator, you can use line commands to configure the switch. Use line commands for advanced switch diagnosis and troubleshooting. If you have problems with your switch, customer support may request that you issue some of these commands to assist them in troubleshooting.
"
See the web configurator parts of this User’s Guide for background information on features configurable by the web configurator.
32.1.1 Switch Configuration File
When you configure the switch using either the CLI or web configurator, the settings are saved as a series of commands in a configuration file on the switch. You can perform the following with a configuration file:
• Back up switch configuration once the switch is set up to work in your network.
• Restore switch configuration.
• Use the same configuration file to set all switches (of the same model) in your network to the same settings.
"
You may also edit a configuration file using a text editor.
"
Make sure you use valid commands. The switch rejects configuration files with invalid or incomplete commands.
209
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
210
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
32.2 Accessing the CLI
You can use a direct console connection or Telnet to access the CLI on the switch.
"
The switch automatically logs you out of the management interface after five minutes of inactivity. If this happens to you, simply log back in again.
32.2.1 Multiple Login
You can use a direct console connection or Telnet to access the command interpreter on the switch.
"
The switch automatically logs you out of the management interface after five minutes of inactivity. If this happens to you, simply log back in again.
• By default, the multi-login feature is enabled to allow multiple CLI management sessions.
• Use the configure multi-login command in the configuration mode to allow multiple concurrent logins. However, no more than five concurrent login sessions are allowed. To disable this feature, use the configure no multi-login command.
32.2.2 The Console Port
Connect to the switch’s console port using a terminal emulation software configured to the following settings:
• VT100 terminal emulation
• 9600 bps
• No parity
• 8 data bits
• 1 stop bit
• No flow control
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
32.2.2.1 Initial Screen
When you turn on your switch, it performs several internal tests as well as line initialization.
You can view the initialization information using the console port. After the initialization, the login screen displays (refer to
Copyright (c) 1994 - 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corp.
initialize mgmt, ethernet address: 00:13:49:01:23:45 initialize switch, ethernet address: 00:13:49:01:23:46
Initializing switch unit 0...
Press ENTER to continue...
32.2.3 Telnet
Use the following steps to telnet into your switch.
1 For local management, connect your computer to the RJ-45 management port (labeled
MGMT) on the switch.
2 Make sure your computer IP address and the switch IP address are on the same subnet.
In Windows, click Start (usually in the bottom left corner), Run and then type telnet
192.168.0.1
(the default management IP address) and click OK.
3 A login screen displays.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
211
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
32.2.4 SSH
You can use an SSH client program to access the switch. The following figure shows an example using a text-based SSH client program. Refer to the documentation that comes with your SSH program for information on using it.
C:\>ssh2 [email protected]
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
@ WARNING: HOST IDENTIFICATION HAS CHANGED! @
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT SOMEONE IS DOING SOMETHING NASTY!
Someone could be eavesdropping on you right now (man-in-the-middle attack)!
It is also possible that the host key has just been changed.
Please contact your system administrator.
Add correct host key to "C:/Documents and Settings/Administrator/Application
Data/SSH/hostkeys/key_22_192.168.0.1.pub" to get rid of this message.
Received server key's fingerprint: xigil-gidot-homug-duzab-tocyh-pamybronep-tisaf-hebip-gokeb-goxix You can get a public key's fingerprint by running % ssh-keygen -F publickey.pub
on the keyfile. Agent forwarding is disabled to avoid attacks by corrupted servers. X11 forwarding is disabled to avoid attacks by corrupted servers.
Are you sure you want to continue connecting (yes/no)? yes
Do you want to change the host key on disk (yes/no)? yes
Agent forwarding re-enabled.
X11 forwarding re-enabled.
Host key saved to C:/Documents and Settings/Administrator/Application Data/
SSH/hostkeys/key_22_192.168.0.1.pub host key for 192.168.0.1, accepted by
Administrator Thu May 12 2005 09:52:21 admin's password:
Authentication successful.
Copyright (c) 1994 - 2005 ZyXEL Communications Corp.
sysname>
32.3 The Login Screen
After you have successfully established a connection to the switch using a direct console connection or Telnet, a login screen displays. The following figure shows an example. For your first login, enter the default administrator login username “admin” and password “1234”.
Enter User Name : admin
Enter Password : XXXX
32.4 Command Syntax Conventions
The rules of the commands are listed next.
• The command keywords are in courier new font.
• The required fields in a command are enclosed in angle brackets <>, for instance, ping
<ip> means that you must specify an IP number for this command.
212
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
• The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets [], for instance, configure snmp-server [contact <system contact>] [location
<system location>] means that the contact and location fields are optional.
• “Command” refers to a command used in the command line interface (CI command).
• The | symbol means “or”.
• The entry <cr> in the command lines refers to carriage return. Press [ENTER] or carriage return after a command to execute the command.
• Use the up (y) or down (z) arrow key to scroll through the command history list.
• The CLI does not accept partial or incomplete commands. You may enter a unique part of a command and press
[TAB]
to have the switch automatically display the full command. For example, if you enter “ config ” and press
[TAB]
, the full command of “ configure ” automatically displays.
• Each interface refers to a port on the switch. Commands configured after the interface command correspond to the port.
• Type multiple ports or port ranges separated by a comma. Ranges of port numbers are typed separated by a dash.
32.5 Getting Help
The system includes a help facility to provide you with the following information about the commands:
• List of available commands under a command group.
• Detailed descriptions of the commands.
32.5.1 List of Available Commands
Enter “ help ” to display a list of available commands and the corresponding sub commands.
Enter “ ?
” to display a list of commands you can use. sysname> help
Commands available:
help
logout
exit
history
enable
show ip <cr>
ping <ip|host-name> <cr>
traceroute <ip|host-name> <cr>
ssh <1|2> <[user@]dest-ip> <cr>
ssh <1|2> <[user@]dest-ip> [command </>] sysname>
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
213
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands sysname> ?
enable Turn on privileged commands
exit Exit from the EXEC
help Description of the interactive help system
history Show a list of previously run commands
logout Exit from the EXEC
ping Exec ping
show Show system information
ssh SSH client
traceroute Exec traceroute sysname>
32.5.2 Detailed Command Information
Enter <command> help to display detailed sub command and parameters.
Enter <command> ?
to display detailed help information about the sub commands and parameters. sysname> ping help
Commands available:
ping <ip>
<
[ in-band|out-of-band|vlan <vlan-id> ]
[ size <0-1472> ]
[ -t ]
> sysname> sysname> ping ?
<ip|host-name> destination ip address
help Description of ping help sysname>
32.6 Changing the Password
This command is used to change the password for Enable mode. By default the same password is used to enter the command line interface (CLI) and Enable and Config modes of the CLI.
The password you change with this command is required to enter Enable and Config modes of the CLI.
Syntax: password <password> where
<password> = Specifies the new password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) users have to type in to enter Enable and Config modes.
214
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
32.7 Account Privilege Levels
You can use a command whose privilege level is equal to or less than that of your login account. For example, if your login account has a privilege level of 12, you can use all commands with privilege levels from 0 to 12. 0-privileged commands are available to all login accounts.
32.8 Command Modes
There are three command modes: User, Enable and Configure. The modes (and commands) available to you depend on what level of privilege your account has. Use the logins username command in Configure mode to set up accounts and privilege levels.
When you first log into the command interpreter with a read-only account (having a privilege of 0 to 12), the initial mode is User mode. The User mode commands are a subset of the
Enable mode commands. The User mode command prompt ends with an angle bracket (>).
To enter Enable (or privileged) mode using a read-only account, type enable and enter the administrator password when prompted (the default is 1234). When you enter Enable mode, the command prompt changes to the pound sign ( # ). If you log into the command interpreter as an administrator you automatically enter Enable mode.
The following table describes command interpreter modes and how to access them..
Table 78 Command Interpreter Mode Summary
MODE
User
.
DESCRIPTION
Commands available in this mode are a subset of enable mode. You can perform basic tests and display general system information.
HOW TO LOGIN/
ACCESS
Default login level for a read-only account.
PROMPT sysname>
The first part of the prompt is the system name. In the CLI examples in this User’s
Guide, the system name is always “sysname”.
Enable Commands available in this mode allow you to save configuration settings, reset configuration settings as well as display further system information. This mode also contains the configure command which takes you to config mode.
Default login level for the administrator or accounts with a privilege of 13 or 14.
Read-only accounts
(with a privilege of 0 -
12) need to type the enable command and enter the Enable mode password.
sysname#
Config Commands available in this mode allow you to configure settings that affect the switch globally.
Type config or configure in
Enable mode.
sysname(config)#
Command modes that follow are sub-modes of the config mode and can only be accessed from within the config mode.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
215
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 78 Command Interpreter Mode Summary (continued)
MODE .
DESCRIPTION
HOW TO LOGIN/
ACCESS
Config-interface
Config-mvr config-vdslalarmprofile config-vdsl-profile This is a sub-mode of the config mode and allows you to configure VDSL profiles.
Config-vlan
This is a sub-mode of the config mode and allows you to configure port related settings.
This is a sub-mode of the config mode and allows you to configure multicast
VLAN settings.
To enter enter
MVR mvr
mode,
followed by a VLAN ID (between 1 and 4094). For example, enter mvr 2 to configure multicast settings on VLAN 2.
This is a sub-mode of the config mode and allows you to configure VDSL alarm profiles..
This is a sub-mode of the config mode and allows you to configure VLAN settings.
Type interface port-channel i followed by a port number. For example, nterface portchannel 10 to configure port 10 on the switch.
Type vlanalarmprofile followed by a profile name. For example, vdslalarmprofile test .
Type vlanprofile followed by a profile name. For example, vdslprofile standard .
Type vlan example,
followed by a number (between
1 and 4094). For vlan 10 to configure settings for
VLAN 10.
PROMPT sysname(configinterface)# sysname(config-mvr)# sysname(configvdslalarmprofile)# sysname(configvdslprofile)# sysname(config-vlan)#
32.9 Using Command History
The switch keeps a list of command(s) you have entered for the current CLI session. You can use any commands in the history again by pressing the up (y) or down (z) arrow key to scroll through the previously used commands and press
[ENTER]
. Use the history command to display the list of commands. sysname> history
enable
exit
history sysname>
216
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
32.10 Saving Your Configuration
After you set the switch settings with the configuration commands, use the write memory command to save the changes permanently. sysname# write memory
"
The
write memory
command is not available in User mode.
You must save your changes after each CLI session. All unsaved configuration changes are lost once you restart the switch.
32.10.1 Logging Out
In User or Enable mode, enter the exit or logout command to log out of the CLI. In Config mode entering exit takes you out of the Config mode and into Enable mode and entering logout logs you out of the CLI.
32.11 Command Summary
The following sections summarize the commands available in the switch together with a brief description of each command. Commands listed are in alphabetical order. The P column on the right indicates the administrator privilege level needed to use the command.
See the related section in the User’s Guide for more background information.
32.11.1 User Mode
The following table describes the commands available for User mode.
Table 79 Command Summary: User Mode
COMMAND enable exit help history logout ping <ip|host-name>
<[in-band|out-of-band|vlan
<vlan-id>] [size <0-1472>]
[-t ]> help
DESCRIPTION
Accesses Enable (or privileged) mode. See
.
Logs out from the CLI.
Displays help information.
Displays a list of previously command(s) that you have executed. The switch stores up to 256 commands in history.
Exits from the CLI.
Sends Ping request to an Ethernet device.
Displays command help information.
P
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
217
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 79 Command Summary: User Mode (continued)
COMMAND DESCRIPTION show hardware-monitor <C|F> hardware-version ip system-information ssh <1|2> <[user@]dest-ip>
Displays current hardware monitor information with the specified temperature unit (Celsius C or Fahrenheit F).
Displays whether the Switch is a VDSL1 (100100 or
10050) or VDSL2 device (5030).
Displays the IP settings.
Displays general system information.
Connects to an SSH server with the specified SSH version.
Determines the path a packet takes to a device. traceroute <ip|host-name>
[in-band|out-of-band|vlan
<vlan-id>]
[ttl <1-255>]
[wait <1-60>]
[queries <1-10>] help Displays the command help information.
P
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
32.11.2 Enable Mode
The following table describes the commands available for Enable mode.
Table 80 Command Summary: Enable Mode
COMMAND baudrate boot configure erase exit help history igmp-flush
<1|2|3|4|5> config running-config
DESCRIPTION
Changes the console port speed.
Choices are 1 (9600), 2 (19200),
3(38400), 4 (57600) and 5 (115200).
Restarts the system.
Accesses Configuration mode. See
<ip>
<remote-file>
Backs up running configuration to the specified TFTP server with the specified file name.
disable enable
<ip> <remotefile>
Restores configuration with the specified filename from the specified
TFTP server.
<remote-file>
Restores firmware via TFTP.
Exits Enable (or privileged) mode.
Accesses Enable (or privileged) mode.
P
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
Resets to the factory default settings. 13
Exits Enable (or privileged) mode.
13
Displays help information.
Displays a list of command(s) that you have previously executed.
Clears all IGMP information.
13
13
13
218
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 80 Command Summary: Enable Mode (continued)
COMMAND kick logout mac-flush tcp <session ID>
<port-num>
DESCRIPTION
Disconnects the specified TCP session.
Exits Enable (or privileged) mode.
Clears the MAC address table.
Removes all learned MAC address on the specified port(s).
Clears the ARP table.
Clears interface statistics.
Clears system logs.
Sends Ping request to an Ethernet device.
P
13 no reload arp interface logging ping <ip|host-name>
[in-band|out-ofband|vlan <vlan-id>]
[size <0-1472>]
[-t ] help config show
<port-number> classifier cluster diffserv garp hardware-monitor
<C|F> hardware-version https member mac <macaddr>
Displays command help information. 13
Restarts the system with the stored configurations.
13
Displays all classifier related information.
13
<name> Displays the specified classifier related information.
candidates member
13
Displays cluster management status.
13
Displays cluster candidate information.
13
13 member config
Displays the MAC address of the cluster member(s).
Displays the configuration of the cluster member(s).
13
13 Displays the status of the cluster member(s).
Displays general DiffServ settings.
Displays GARP information.
Displays current hardware monitor information with the specified temperature unit (Celsius C or
Fahrenheit F).
13
13
13 certificate key <rsa|dsa> session timeout
Displays whether the Switch is a
VDSL1 (100100 or 10050) or
VDSL2 device (5030).
Displays the HTTPS information.
13
Displays the HTTPS certificates.
Displays the HTTPS key.
Displays current HTTPS session(s).
13
13
13
13
Displays the HTTPS session timeout. 13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
219
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 80 Command Summary: Enable Mode (continued)
COMMAND igmp-filtering igmp-snooping profile
DESCRIPTION
Displays IGMP filtering profile settings.
Displays global IGMP snooping settings.
Displays current interface status.
P
13
13 interfaces <portnumber> interfaces config
<port-list> ip lacp logging loginPrecedence logins mac address-table mac-aging-time multicast multi-login mvr
13
Displays current interface configuration.
13 bandwidth-control Displays bandwidth control settings. 13 bstorm-control Displays broadcast storm control settings.
13 egress igmp-filtering igmp-grouplimited imgp-immediateleave igmp-query-mode protocol-basedvlan
Displays outgoing port information.
Displays IGMP filtering settings.
Displays the IGMP group limit.
Displays the IGMP Immediate Leave setting.
13
Displays IGMP query mode settings. 13
Displays protocol-based VLAN settings.
13
13
13
13 arp route route static tcp udp
Displays IP related information.
Displays the ARP table.
Displays IP routing information.
Displays IP static route information.
Displays IP TCP status.
Displays UDP status.
Displays LACP (Link Aggregation
Control Protocol) settings.
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
Clears system logs. 13
Displays login precedence settings. 13
Displays login account information.
13
13 all <sort> Displays MAC address table. sort = mac , vid or port . count Displays the count of the MAC addresses stored in the MAC address table.
13 static Displays static MAC address table.
Displays MAC learning aging time.
Displays multicast settings.
Displays multi-login information
DIsplays all MVR (Multicast VLAN
Registration) settings.
13
13
13
13
13
220
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 80 Command Summary: Enable Mode (continued)
COMMAND
<VID>
DESCRIPTION
Displays the specified MVR group settings.
Displays Packet Loop Test (PLT).
P
13 plt policy port-accessauthenticator port-security radius-server remote-management
13
Displays all policy related information. 13
<name> Displays the specified policy related information.
13
13
<port-list>
<port-list>
Displays all port authentication settings.
Displays port authentication settings on the specified port(s).
Displays all port security settings.
13
13
13 Displays port security settings on the specified port(s).
Displays RADIUS server settings. 13
13
<index>
Displays all secured client information.
Displays the specified secured client information.
13 running-config service-control sfp display
Displays current operating configuration.
Displays service control settings.
Displays detailed information of the
SFP transceiver(s) installed in the mini GBIC slot(s).
snmp-server spanning-tree config ssh
Displays SNMP settings.
Displays Spanning Tree Protocol
(STP) settings.
Displays general SSH settings. key
<rsa1|rsa|dsa>
Displays internal SSH public and private key information. known-hosts Displays known SSH hosts information. system-information time timesync trunk vdsl-alarmprofile vdsl-profile
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13 session Displays current SSH session(s).
13
Displays general system information. 13
Displays current system time and date.
13
Displays time server information. 13
Displays link aggregation information. 13
13
<profile-name>
Displays a summary list of VDSL alarm profiles.
Displays the settings of a VDSL alarm profile.
13
Displays a summary list of VDSL profiles.
13
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
221
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 80 Command Summary: Enable Mode (continued)
COMMAND vdsl-psdprofile vlan vlan-stacking ssh <1|2> <[user@]destip> traceroute <ip|host-name>
<profile-name>
<profile-name>
<vlan-id> vlan1q gvrp port-isolation
<command </>>
[<vlan-id>][ttl
<1-255>] [wait
<1-60>] [queries
<1-10>]
DESCRIPTION
Displays settings of the specified
VDSL profile.
Displays a summary list of VDSL PSD profiles.
Displays settings of the specified
VDSL PSD profile.
Displays the status of all VLANs.
Displays the status of the specified
VLAN.
Displays GVRP settings.
Displays VLAN-based port isolation settings.
Displays VLAN stacking settings.
Connects to an SSH server with the specified SSH version.
Connects to an SSH server with the specified SSH version and addition commands to be executed on the server.
Determines the path a packet takes to a device.
Determines the path a packet takes to a device in the specified VLAN.
P
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13 vdsl <portlist> remote-reset write remote-test reset retrain memory
Resets the connection information and settings on the remote CPE device(s).
Sets the port(s) to test the connection to the remote CPE device(s).
Clears port statistics and connection information. This re-initializes the connection.
Sets the port(s) to establish the connection again.
Saves current configuration to the configuration file the switch is currently using.
13
13
13
13
13
222
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
32.11.3 General Configuration Mode
The following table lists the commands in Configuration (or Config) mode.
Table 81 Command Summary: Configuration Mode
COMMAND adminpassword bandwidthcontrol
<pw-string> <confirmstring> bcptransparency
<[packet-format
<802.3untag|802.3tag|E therIIuntag|EtherIItag
>][priority <0-7> ]
[vlan <vlan-id> ]
[ethernet-type <ethernum|ip|ipx|arp|rarp|ap pletalk|decnet|sna|net bios|dlc][source-mac
<src-mac-addr>]
[source-port <portnum>][destination-mac
<dest-mac-addr> ]
[dscp<0-63>][ipprotocol<protocolnum|tcp|udp|icmp|egp|o spf|rsvp|igmp|igp|pim| ipsec> [establishonly]][source-ip <srcip-addr>[mask-bits
<mask-bits>]]
[source-socket
<socket-num>]
[destination-ip <destip-addr> [mask-bits
<mask-bits>]]
[destination-socket
<socket-num>]
[inactive]> help
DESCRIPTION
Changes the administrator password.
Enables bandwidth control.
Enables Bridge Control
Protocol (BCP) transparency.
Configures a classifier. A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming port number.
cluster <vlan-id> defaultmanagement dhcp-relay member <mac-address> password
<password-str> name <cluster name> rcommand <mac-address>
<in-band|out-of-band>
P
14
13
13
13
Displays command information.
Sets the cluster management
VLAN ID.
Sets the cluster member switch's hardware MAC address and password.
13
13
13
Configures a name to identify the cluster manager.
Logs into a cluster member switch.
13
13
Specifies through which traffic flow the switch is to send packets.
13
Enables DHCP relay settings.
13
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
223
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 81 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND helper-address
<remote-dhcp-server1>
[remote-dhcpserver2] [remotedhcp-server3] information <string> option diffserv dscp <0-63> priority
<0-7> exit garp join <100-65535> leave
<msec> leaveall <msec> help history hostname <name_string> https cert-regeneration
<rsa|dsa> timeout <0-65535> igmpfiltering
<profile name> startaddress <ip> endaddress <ip> igmp-snooping
8021p-priority <0 - 7> host-timeout <1 -
16711450> leave-timeout <1 -
16711450> unknown-multicastframe <drop|flooding> interface port-channel
<port-list> ip address <ip> <mask>
DESCRIPTION
Sets the IP addresses of up to
3 DHCP servers.
P
13
Specifies the agent information the device to add to DHCP requests.
Sets the device to add DHCP relay agent information.
Enables DiffServ.
Sets the DSCP-to-IEEE
802.1q mappings.
Exits from the CLI.
Configures GARP time settings.
Displays help information.
Displays a list of previous command(s) that you have executed.
Sets the switch’s name for identification purposes.
Re-generates a certificate.
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
Sets how many seconds a management session (via the web configurator) can be left idle before the session times out.
Enables IGMP filtering.
13
13
Sets the starting and ending
IGMP addresses.
13
Enables IGMP snooping.
Sets a priority level (0-7) to which the switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets.
Sets the host timeout value.
13
13
13
Sets the leave timeout value 13
Sets the action on unknown multicast frames received.
Enables a port or a list of ports for configuration. See
details.
Sets the management IP address and subnet mask.
13
13
13
224
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 81 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND name-server default-gateway
<ip>
<ip>
DESCRIPTION
Sets the default gateway’s IP address.
Sets the IP address of a domain name server.
Creates a static route.
P
13
13
13 lacp loginPreceden ce logins system-priority
<LocalOnly |
LocalRADIUS |
RADIUSOnly> username <name> logout mac-agingtime mac-filter
<10-3000> name <name> mac <macaddr> vlan <vlan-id> drop <src/dst/both>
[metric <metric>]
[name <name>]
[inactive]
Sets the metric of a static route or deactivates a static route.
13
<1-65535> password <pwd> privilege <0-14>
Enables Link Aggregation
Control Protocol (LACP).
Sets the priority of an active port using LACP.
Select which database the switch should use (first) to authenticate a user.
Configures up to four readonly login accounts.
13
13
14
14
Sets the access privilege for the existing login accounts.
The higher the value, the more commands are allowed.
14
Exits from the CLI. 13
Sets learned MAC aging time.
13
Configures a static MAC address port filtering rule.
13 mac-forward route<ip> <mask>
<next-hop-ip> name <name> mac <macaddr> vlan <vlan-id> interface <interfaceid> inactive Disables a static MAC address port filtering rule.
Configures a static MAC address forwarding rule.
13
13 mirror-port
<port-num> mode zynos multi-login mvr <vlan-id> no bandwidth-control inactive Disables a static MAC address forwarding rule.
Enables port mirroring.
Sets a monitor port.
Changes the CLI mode to the
ZyNOS format.
Enables multi-login.
Enters the MVR (Multicast
VLAN Registration) configuration mode.
See
for more information.
Disable bandwidth control on the switch.
13
13
13
13
14
13
13
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
225
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 81 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND bcp-transparency classifier <name> cluster inactive
DESCRIPTION
Disables Bridge Control
Protocol (BCP) transparency.
Disables the classifier. Each classifier has one rule.
If you disable a classifier you cannot use policy rule related information.
P
13
13
Enables a classifier.
Disables cluster management on the switch.
13
13
Removes the cluster member.
13 dhcp-relay diffserv igmp-filtering information option https timeout profile <name> profile <name> start-address <ip> end-address <ip>
Disables DHCP relay.
Disables the relay agent information option 82.
13
13
System name is not appended to option 82 information field.
13
Disables the DiffServ settings. 13
Resets the session timeout to the default of 300 seconds.
13
13 Disables IGMP filtering on the switch.
Disables the specified IGMP filtering profile.
13
Clears the settings of the specified IGMP filtering profile.
13 igmp-snooping ip ip route <ip> <mask> lacp logins mac-filter name <name> mac <mac-addr> vlan
<vlan-id> member <macaddress>
8021p-priority inactive username <name>
Disables IGMP snooping on the switch.
Disables 8021p-priority change in the outgoing IGMP control packets.
Disables management.
Removes a specified IP static route.
Enables a specified IP static route.
Disables the link aggregation control protocol (dynamic trunking) on the switch.
Disables login access for the specified account name.
Disables the specified MAC filter rule.
13
13
13
13
13
13
14
13 inactive Enables the specified MACfilter rule.
13
226
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 81 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND mac-forward name
<name> mac <mac-addr> vlan <vlan-id> interface <interfaceid> mirror-port multi-login mvr <vlan-id> policy <name> port-accessauthenticator remote-management
<index> inactive
<port-list> reauthenticate port-security radius-server service-control inactive
<port-list>
<port-list>
<port-list> learn inactive service <[telnet]
[ftp] [http]
[icmp] [snmp]
[ssh] [https]> ftp http https icmp snmp
DESCRIPTION
Removes the specified MAC forwarding entry, belonging to a VLAN group (if any) forwarded through an interface(s).
Enables the specified MAC address, belonging to a VLAN group (if any) forwarded through an interface(s).
Disables port mirroring on the switch.
Disables multiple logins.
Disable MVR on the switch.
Deletes the specified policy. A policy sets actions for the classified traffic.
P
13
13
13
Enables a policy.
Disables port authentication on the switch.
Disables authentication on the listed ports.
Disables the re-authentication mechanism on the listed port(s).
Disables port security on the switch.
Disables port security on the specified ports.
13
13
13
13
13
13
Enables MAC address learning on the specified ports.
Disables the use of authentication from the
RADIUS server.
Clears a secure client set entry from the list of secure clients.
Disables a secure client set entry number from using the selected remote management service(s).
Disables FTP access to the switch.
Disables web browser control to the switch.
13
13
13
13
13
13
Disables secure web browser access to the switch.
Disables ICMP access to the switch such as pinging and tracerouting.
13
13
Disables SNMP management.
13
14
13
13
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
227
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 81 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND snmp-server spanning-tree ssh ssh telnet trap-destination
<ip>
DESCRIPTION
Disables SSH (Secure Shell) server access to the switch.
Disables telnet access to the switch.
Disables sending of SNMP traps to a station.
Disables (R)STP.
<port-list> Disables (R)STP on the specified ports.
key <rsa1|rsa|dsa> Disables the secure shell server encryption key. Your switch supports SSH versions
1 and 2 using RSA and DSA authentication.
Removes all remote hosts. known-hosts known-hosts <hostip>
Removes the specified remote hosts from the list of all known hosts.
storm-control syslog known-hosts <hostip> [1024|sshrsa|ssh-dsa] server <ipaddress> server <ipaddress> inactive type <type>
Removes remote known hosts with the specified public key
(1024-bit RSA1, RSA or DSA).
Disables broadcast storm control.
Disables syslog logging.
Disables syslog logging to the specified syslog server.
Enables syslog logging to the specified syslog server. timesync trunk <T1> interface <portlist> lacp vdsl-alarmprofile <profile-name> vdsl-profile <profile-name> vdsl-psd profile <profile-name>
P
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
DIsables syslog logging for the specified log type ( report ). sys , link , config , error or
Removes the time server protocol.
13
13
Disables port group trunking.
13
Removes ports from the trunk group.
13
13 Disables LACP in the trunk group.
Removes a VDSL alarm profile. You cannot delete a default profile (DEFVAL).
13
Removes a VDSL profile. You cannot delete a default profile
(DEFVAL).
Removes a VDSL PSD profile.
You cannot delete a default profile (DEFVAL).
13
13
228
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Table 81 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND vlan vlan1q
<profile-name> physide <1|2> frequence <0 -
30000>
<vlan-id> gvrp port-isolation vlan-stacking wfq fe-spq password policy
<password>
<name> classifier
<classifier-list>
<[ vlan<vlan-id> ]
[ egress-port <portnum> ][ priority <0-7>
][ dscp <0-63>] [tos
<0-7> ][bandwidth
<bandwidth>][ egressmask<port-list>]
[outgoing-packetformat
<tagged|untagged>]
[out-of-profile-dscp
<0-63>][forward-action
<drop|forward|egressma sk>][queue-action
<prio-set|prioqueue|prio-replacetos> ][diffserv-action
<diff-set-tos|diffreplace-priority|diffset-dscp>][outgoingmirror][outgoingeport][outgoing-nonunicast-eport]
[outgoing-setvlan][metering][outof-profile-action<[ change-dscp][drop][ forward][set-dropprec][inactive]> help port-accessauthenticator
<port-list>
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
DESCRIPTION
Removes the specified breakpoint in a VDSL PSD profile.
P
13
Deletes the static VLAN entry.
13
Disables GVRP on the switch.
13
Disables port isolation.
Disables VLAN stacking.
13
13
13 Disables Strict Priority
Queuing on the fast Ethernet
(10/100Mbps) ports.
Change the password for
Enable mode.
Configures a policy.
A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria. A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network.
14
13
Displays command information.
Enables 802.1x authentication on the switch.
Enables 802.1x authentication on the specified port(s).
13
13
13
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
229
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 81 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND reauthenticate port-security
<port-list> reauth-period
<reauth-period> address-limit
<number> learn inactive
MAC-freeze
DESCRIPTION
Sets a subscriber to periodically re-enter his or her username and password to stay connected to a specified port.
Specifies how often a client has to re-enter the username and password to stay connected to the specified port(s).
Enables port security on the switch.
Enables the port security feature on the specified port(s).
Disables MAC address learning on the specified port(s).
Limits the number of (dynamic)
MAC addresses that may be learned on a port.
Disables MAC address learning and enables port security.
P
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
Note: All previously learned dynamic
MAC addresses are saved to the static MAC address table.
queue radius-server remotemanagement servicecontrol level <0-7> priority
<0-7> host <ip>
Sets the priority level-tophysical queue mapping.
Sets the IP address of the external RADIUS server,
[acct-port
<socket-number>]
[key <key-string>]
Sets the UDP port and shared key for the external RADIUS server.
<index> Enables a remote management setting. start-addr <ip> end-addr <ip> service <[telnet]
[ftp] [http]
[icmp] [snmp]
[ssh] [https]>
Specifies a group of trusted computer(s) from which an administrator may use a service to manage the switch.
ftp <socket-number> http <socket-number>
<timeout>
Allows FTP access on the specified service port.
Allows HTTP access on the specified service port and defines the timeout period.
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
230
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Table 81 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND https <socket-number> snmp-server icmp snmp ssh <socket-number> telnet <socket-number>
[contact <system contact>] [location
<system location>] get-community
<property> set-community
<property> trap-community
<property> trap-destination <ip> spanning-tree
<port-list>
<port-list> path-cost
<1-65535>
<port-list> priority
<0-255> hello-time <1-10> maximum-age <6-40> forward-delay <4-30> help priority <0-61440> spq
<host-ip>
<1024|ssh-rsa|ssh-dsa>
<key> storm-control syslog server <ip-adderss> inactive level <0 ~ 7>
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
DESCRIPTION
Allows HTTPS access on the specified service port.
Allows ICMP access for services like Ping.
Allows SNMP management.
Allows SSH access on the specified service port.
Allows Telnet access on the specified service port.
Sets the geographic location and the name of the person in charge of this switch.
Sets the get community.
P
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
Sets the set community.
Sets the trap community.
13
13
Sets the IP addresses of up to four stations to send your
SNMP traps to.
Enables STP on the switch.
Enables STP on a specified port.
Sets the STP path cost for a specified port.
Sets the priority for a specified port.
Sets Hello Time, Maximum
Age and Forward Delay.
13
13
13
13
13
13
Displays command help information.
Sets the bridge priority of the switch.
Sets the switch to use Strictly
Priority Queuing (SPQ).
Adds a remote host to which the switch can access using
SSH service.
Enables broadcast storm control on the switch.
Enables syslog logging.
Disables syslog logging to the specified syslog server.
Sets the IP address of the syslog server and the severity level.
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
231
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 81 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND time timesync trunk vdslalarmprofile
<name> vdsl-port vdsl-profile
<name> vdsl-psd profile
<name> vlan vlan1q type <type>
<Hour:Min:Sec> date <month/day/year> help timezone <-
1200|...|1200>
<daytime|time|ntp> server <ip>
<T1> physide <1 | 2> frequence <0 - 30000> level <125 - 1400>
<1-4094> facility <0 ~ 7> interface <portlist> lacp interface <port-list> timeout <lacp-
<port-list> gvrp port-isolation timeout>
<enable|disable> alarm-profilename
<name-str> profilename <namestr> psd-profilename
<name-str>
DESCRIPTION
Sets the log type.
Sets the log type and the file location on the syslog server.
Sets the time in hour, minute and second format.
13
Sets the date in year, month and day format.
Displays help information.
13
Selects the time difference between UTC (formerly known as GMT) and your time zone.
13
13
Sets the time server protocol.
13
Sets the IP address of your time server.
13
Activates port group trunking.
13
Adds a port(s) to the trunk group.
13
13 Enables LACP for the trunk group.
Defines the port number and
LACP timeout period.
13
P
13
13
Enters the VDSL alarm profile mode.
See
for more information.
Activates/deactivates the
VDSL port(s).
Sets the VDSL port(s) to use the VDSL alarm profile.
Sets the VDSL port(s) to use the VDSL profile.
Sets the VDSL port(s) to use the VDSL PSD profile.
Enters VDSL profile command mode.
See
for more information.
Sets a VDSL PSD profile.
1: DownStream
2: UpStream
Enters the VLAN configuration mode. See
for more information.
Enables GVRP.
Enables VLAN port isolation on all ports.
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
232
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 81 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND vlan-stacking
<SPTPID> vlan-type <802.1q|port-based> wfq fe-spq <Q0-Q7>
DESCRIPTION
Enables VLAN stacking on the device.
Sets the service provider’s TP
(Tagged Protocol) ID.
Specifies the VLAN type.
Sets the switch to use Weight
Fair Queuing (WFQ) queuing.
Sets the switch to use WFQ to service all queues for the
Ethernet port.
P
13
13
13
13
13
32.11.4 interface Commands
The following table lists the interface port-channel commands in configuration mode.
Use these commands to configure the ports.
Table 82 interface port-channel Commands
COMMAND interface portchannel <portlist>
DESCRIPTION
Enables a port or a list of ports for configuration.
P
13 bandwidthlimit cir <Kbps> egress <Kbps> pir <Kbps>
Enables bandwidth control on the port(s).
Sets the guaranteed bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic on the port(s).
Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for outgoing traffic on the port(s).
Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic on the port(s).
Sets how Bridge Protocol Data Units
(BPDUs) are used in STP port states.
13
13
13
13
13 bpdu-control
<peer|tunnel| discard|netwo rk> broadcastlimit
13 cable_diagnos tics diffserv dlf-limit egress set
<port-list>
<pkt/s>
<pkt/s>
Enables broadcast storm control limit on the switch.
Sets how many broadcast packets the interface receives per second.
Displays whether a cable is connected to the port (good) or not (open).
Enables DiffServ settings on the port(s).
Enables the Destination Lookup
Failure (DLF) limit.
Sets the interface DLF limit in packets per second (pps).
Sets the outgoing traffic port list for a port-based VLAN.
13
13
13
13
13
13
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
233
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 82 interface port-channel Commands (continued)
COMMAND exit flow-control frame-type
<all|tagged|u ntagged> gvrp help igmpfiltering igmp-grouplimit profile <name> number <number>
DESCRIPTION
Exits from the interface port-channel command mode.
Enables interface flow control. Flow control regulates transmissions to match the bandwidth of the receiving port.
Choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames or just tagged incoming frames on a port.
Enables this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local switch.
Displays a description of the interface port-channel commands.
Applies the specified IGMP filtering profile.
Enables the IGMP group limiting feature.
Sets the maximum number IGMP groups allowed.
Enables the IGMP immediate leave function.
P
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13 igmpimmediateleave igmp-queriermode
<auto|fixed|e dge> inactive ingress-check intrusionlock mirror multicastlimit dir
<ingress|egress|bot h>
Sets the IGMP querier mode of a port. auto uses the port as an IGMP query port after it receives IGMP query packets. fixed always uses the port as an IGMP query port.
IGMP query port.
edge stops the switch from using the port as an
13
Disables the specified port(s) on the switch.
Enables the device to discard incoming frames for VLANs that are not included in a port member set.
13
13
Enables intrusion lock on a port and a port cannot be connected again after you disconnected the cable.
13
Enables port mirroring on the port(s).
13
Enables port mirroring for incoming, outgoing or both incoming and outgoing traffic.
Port mirroring copies traffic from one or all ports to another or all ports for external analysis.
13
Enables the port(s) multicast limit.
13 name <portname-string>
<pkt/s> Sets how many multicast packets the port(s) receives per second.
Sets a name for the port(s). Enter a descriptive name (up to nine printable
ASCII characters).
13
13
234
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 82 interface port-channel Commands (continued)
COMMAND no bandwidth-limit protocolbased-vlan name <name> broadcast-limit diffserv dlf-limit egress set <portlist> flow-control gvrp igmp-filtering profile igmp-group-limit igmp-immediateleave inactive ingress-check intrusion-lock mirror multicast-limit protocol-based-vlan ethernet-type
<ethe> protocol-based-vlan packet-format
<pack> ethernettype <ethernettype> vlan-trunking ethernet-type
<ethernet-type> vlan <vid> ethernet-type
<ethernet-type> vlan <vid> inactive packet-format
<packet-format> ethernet-type
<ethernet-type> vlan <vid> priority
<0-7>
DESCRIPTION
Disables bandwidth limit on the port(s).
Disables broadcast storm control limit on the port(s).
Disables DiffServ settings on the port(s).
Disables destination lookup failure
(DLF) on the switch.
Sets the outgoing traffic port list for a port-based VLAN.
Disables flow control on the port(s).
Disable GVRP on the port(s).
Disables IGMP filtering.
Disables protocol based VLAN of the specified packet format on the port.(s)
Disables the protocol based VLAN.
Creates a protocol based VLAN with the packet format, VLAN ID and priority.
P
13
13
13
13
13
Disables IGMP group limitation.
Disables the IGMP immediate leave function.
Enables the port(s) on the switch.
Disables ingress checking on the port(s).
Disables intrusion-lock on a port so that a port can be connected again after you disconnected the cable.
13
13
13
13
13
Disables port mirroring on the port(s). 13
Disables multicast limit on the port(s). 13
Disables protocol based VLAN of the specified protocol on the port(s).
13
Disables VLAN trunking on the port(s). 13
Creates a protocol based VLAN with the protocol type and VLAN ID.
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
235
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 82 interface port-channel Commands (continued)
COMMAND packet-format
<packet-format> ethernet-type
<ethernet-type> vlan <vid> priority
<0-7> inactive pvid <1-4094>
DESCRIPTION
Disables the protocol based VLAN. qos priority <0-7> speed-duplex <auto|10-half|10full|100-half|100full|1000-full> test vlan-trunking weight <wt1>
<wt2> ...
<wt8> role <normal | access | tunnel>
SPVID <1-4094>
P
13
The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports. Sets a PVID in the range 1 to
4094 for the specified interface.
Sets the quality of service priority for an interface.
Sets the duplex mode ( half or full ) and speed ( 10 , 100 or 1000
Mbps) of the connection on the interface. Selecting auto (autonegotiation) makes one port able to negotiate with a peer automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support.
Performs an interface loopback test.
Sets the priority of the specified port(s) in VLAN stacking.
Sets the VLAN stacking port roles of the specified port(s).
Sets the service provider VID of the specified port(s).
Enables VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers
(but not ports directly connected to end users) to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the switch.
Sets the queuing weight.
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
32.11.5 mvr Commands
The following table lists the mvr commands in configuration mode.
Table 83 mvr Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION mvr <1-
4094>
8021p-priority <0 - 7> exit
Enters the MVR (Multicast VLAN
Registration) configuration mode.
Select a priority level (0-7) with which the switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets
(belonging to this multicast VLAN).
Exist from the MVR configuration mode.
P
13
13
13
236
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 83 mvr Commands (continued)
COMMAND group <name-str> start-address <ip> end-address <ip> inactive mode
<dynamic|compatible> name <name> no group group <name> inactive receiver-port
<port-list> receiver-port <portlist> source-port <portlist> tagged <port-list> source-port
<port-list> tagged <portlist>
DESCRIPTION
Sets the multicast group range for the MVR.
Disables MVR settings.
Sets the MVR mode.
P
13
13
13
Sets the MVR name for identification purposes.
Disables all MVR group settings.
Disables the specified MVR group setting.
Enables MVR.
Disables the receiver port(s).
An MVR receiver port can only receive multicast traffic in a multicast
VLAN
Disables the source port(s).
An MVR source port can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast
VLAN
Sets the port(s) to remove VLAN tags.
Sets the receiver port(s).
An MVR receiver port can only receive multicast traffic in a multicast
VLAN
Sets the source port(s).
An MVR source port can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast
VLAN
Sets the port(s) to include VLAN tags.
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
32.11.6 vdsl-alarmprofile Commands
The following table lists the vdsl-alarmprofile commands in configuration mode.
Table 84 vdsl-alarmprofile Commands
COMMAND vdslalarmprofile
<name>
DESCRIPTION P
Enters the VDSL alarm profile mode. 13
15minsESs
<threshold>
Sets the number of Errored Seconds
(ES) allowed in any 15-minute period. An alarm is triggered if this number is exceeded.
13
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
237
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 84 vdsl-alarmprofile Commands (continued)
COMMAND
15minsLoss
<threshold>
15minsSESs
<threshold>
DESCRIPTION
Sets the number of Lost of Signal
(Los) errors allowed in any 15-minute period. An alarm is triggered if this number is exceeded.
Sets the number of Severely Errored
Seconds(SES) errors allowed in any
15-minute period. An alarm is triggered if this number is exceeded.
Exits from this command mode.
Sets whether the device is to send an initialization failure trap or not.
P
13
13
13
13 exit initFailure
<on|off>
32.11.7 vdsl-profile Commands
The following table lists the vdsl-profile commands in configuration mode.
Table 85 vdsl-profile Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION vdsl-profile
<name> applicablestandard <2> bandplan <2> compatiblemode <1..4> deployment <1..2>
Enters VDSL profile command mode.
Sets a standard your switch uses for VDSL services.
2: ETSI
Sets a VDSL band plan to use for the line.
2: Bandplan998
Sets the starting band of the frequency range used by VDSL services.
1: none
2: 640kHz
3: 1100kHz
4: 2200kHz
Specify a VDSL deployment scenario.
1: FTTCab
2: FTTEx exit hamband mask
<00000000000..00
000111100>
Exits from the VDSL profile mode.
Sets the device not to transmit signals in the pre-defined HAM
(Handheld Amateur Radio) radio band(s).
Specify maximum interleave delay for downstream traffic in the slow channel.
Specify maximum interleave delay for upstream traffic in the slow channel.
P
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
238
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 85 vdsl-profile Commands (continued)
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Specify the maximum aggregate power level for downstream transmission.
Specify the maximum aggregate power level for upstream transmission. optusage <1..2> Sets the use of optional channel for the upstream or downstream traffic.
1: unused
2: upstream payloadrate maxdsfast
<64..104960>
Specifies the maximum downstream fast channel data rate in bits/second. pbo maxdsslow
<64..104960> maxusfast
<64..104960> maxusslow
<64..104960> mindsfast
<64..104960> us <1..2>
Specifies the maximum downstream slow channel data rate in bits/second.
Specifies the maximum upstream fast channel data rate in bits/ second.
Specifies the maximum upstream slow channel data rate in bits/ second.
Specifies the minimum downstream fast channel data rate in bits/second. mindsslow
<64..104960> minusfast
<64..104960>
Specifies the minimum downstream slow channel data rate in bits/second.
Specifies the minimum upstream fast channel data rate in bits/ second. minusslow
<64..104960>
Specifies the minimum upstream slow channel data rate in bits/ second. uscontrol <1..3> Sets the upstream PBO control.
1: Disable
2: Auto
3: Manual uslevel <0..120> Sets the upstream PBO level.
Sets a PSD mask for the downstream traffic.
Sets a PSD mask for the upstream traffic.
Sets a rate adaptive mode for the downstream traffic
1: Manual
2: AdaptAtInit
P
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
239
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 85 vdsl-profile Commands (continued)
COMMAND us <1|2>
DESCRIPTION
Sets a rate adaptive mode for the upstream traffic
1: Manual
2: AdaptAtInit
Specify the downstream data rate allocated for the fast and slow channels.
0: slow channel
100: fast channel
Specify the upstream data rate allocated for the fast and slow channels.
0: slow channel
100: fast channel
Sets the maximum downstream
SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio). dsmin <0..127> Sets the minimum downstream
SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio). dstarget
<0..127> usmax <0..127>
Sets the target downstream SNR
(Signal to Noise Ratio).
Sets the maximum upstream
SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio). usmin <0..127> ustarget
<0..127> us <0..1275>
Sets the minimum upstream SNR
(Signal to Noise Ratio).
Sets the target upstream SNR
(Signal to Noise Ratio).
Sets the target burst rate for the downstream slow channel.
Sets the target burst rate for the upstream slow channel.
P
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
32.11.8 vlan Commands
The following table lists the vlan commands in configuration mode.
Table 86 vlan Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION vlan <1-4094> exit fixed <portlist> forbidden
<port-list> help inactive ip address <ip-address>
<mask>
Creates a new VLAN group.
Leaves the VLAN configuration mode.
Specifies the port(s) to be a permanent member of this VLAN group.
Specifies the port(s) you want to prohibit from joining this VLAN group.
13
Displays a list of available VLAN commands. 13
Disables the specified VLAN. 13
Sets the IP address and subnet mask of the switch in the specified VLAN for packet loopback test.
13
P
13
13
13
240
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
Table 86 vlan Commands (continued)
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Specifies the port(s) you don’t want to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN
Group ID.
P
<ip-address>
<mask> manageable
Allows the switch to be managed using this specified IP address.
13 defaultgateway <ipaddress>
Sets a default gateway IP address for this
VLAN.
13 inband-default
<ip-address>
<mask> ip address inband-default dhcp-bootp
Sets a static in-band IP address and subnet mask.
13 inband-default dhcp-bootp
<cr> ip address defaultgateway
Sets the dynamic in-band IP address. 13 inband-default dhcp-bootp release ip address
<ip-address>
<mask>
Releases the dynamic in-band IP address. 13 inband-default dhcp-bootp renew inactive
Updates the dynamic in-band IP address. 13 name <namestr> forbidden
<port-list>
Specifies a name for identification purposes. no fixed list>
Sets fixed port(s) to normal port(s).
Sets forbidden port(s) to normal port(s).
13
13
13
Enables the specified VLAN. 13
Deletes the IP address and subnet mask in this VLAN.
13
Deletes the default gateway in this VLAN. 13
Sets the default in-band interface to use a static IP address in this VLAN.
The switch will use the default IP address of
0.0.0.0 if you do not configure a static IP address.
13 normal <portlist> untagged
<port-list> untagged
<port-list>
Specifies the port(s) you want to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN
Group ID.
Specifies the port(s) to dynamically join this
VLAN group using GVRP
13
13
13
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
241
Chapter 32 Introducing the Commands
242
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 33
Command Examples
This chapter describes some commands in more detail.
33.1 Overview
These are commands that you may use frequently in maintaining your switch.
33.2 show Commands
These are the commonly used show commands.
33.2.1 show interface
Syntax: show interface [port-number]
This command displays statistics of a port. The following example shows that port 2 is up and the related information. sysname# show interface 2
Port Info Port NO. :2
Link :100M/F
Status :FORWARDING
LACP :Disabled
TxPkts :0
------------------------------- [Snip] --------------------------------
LPRs :0 / 0
C15MinsTimeElapsed :0 / 0
Curr15MinLofs :0 / 0
Curr15MinLoss :0 / 0
Curr15MinLols :0 / 0
Curr15MinLprs :0 / 0
C1DayTimeElapsed :0 / 1
Curr1DayLofs :1 / 0
Curr1DayLoss :0 / 0
Curr1DayLols :0 / 0
Curr1DayLprs :0 / 0 sysname#
243
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 33 Command Examples
33.2.2 show ip
Syntax: show ip
This command displays the IP related information (such as IP address and subnet mask) on all switch interfaces.
The following figure shows the default interface settings. sysname> show ip
Out-of-band Management IP Address = 192.168.0.1
Management IP Address
IP[192.168.0.1], Netmask[255.255.255.0], VID[0]
IP Interface
IP[192.168.1.1], Netmask[255.255.255.0], VID[1]
33.2.3 show logging
Syntax: show logging
This command displays the system logs. The following figure shows an example. sysname# show logging
56 Thu Jan 1 00:01:04 1970 PSSV -WARN SNMP TRAP 0: cold start
57 Thu Jan 1 00:01:04 1970 PSSV WARN System cold start
58 Thu Jan 1 00:01:04 1970 PP1f -WARN SNMP TRAP 26: Event On Trap
59 Thu Jan 1 00:01:06 1970 PKEB INFO User admin login
60 Thu Jan 1 00:02:46 1970 PP0c -WARN SNMP TRAP 3: port 18 link up
61 Thu Jan 1 00:02:46 1970 PP0c ERROR Port 18 link up
62 Thu Jan 1 00:03:23 1970 PP27 INFO User admin logout
63 Thu Jan 1 00:03:28 1970 PKEB INFO User admin login
Clear Error Log (y/n):
If you clear a log (by entering y at the Clear Error Log (y/n): prompt), you cannot view it again.
33.2.4 show mac address-table all
Syntax: show mac address-table all <sort>
Where
<sort> = Specifies the sorting criteria (MAC, VID or port).
244
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 33 Command Examples
This command displays the MAC address(es) stored in the switch. The following example shows the MAC address table. sysname# show mac address-table all
Port VLAN ID MAC Address Type
18 1 00:02:e3:30:43:34 Dynamic
18 1 00:04:80:9b:78:00 Dynamic
18 1 00:0d:60:8f:09:a1 Dynamic
18 1 00:0f:fe:1e:4a:e0 Dynamic
18 1 00:13:49:22:a3:3b Dynamic
18 1 00:c0:9f:cd:cc:5f Dynamic
18 1 00:c0:a8:fa:e9:27 Dynamic sysname#
33.2.5 show multi-login
Syntax: show multi-login
This command displays the multiple login settings or the number of CLI management sessions.
The following example shows that there are currently one console port and one Telnet sessions to the switch. sysname# show multi-login
[session info ('*' denotes your session)] index session remote ip
----- ---------- ---------------
* 1 console -
2 telnet-d 172.23.37.10
sysname#
If the multiple login feature is disabled (using the no multi-login command in Config mode), the screen displays as shown. sysname# show multi-login multi-login is disabled sysname#
33.2.6 show system-information
Syntax: show system-information
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
245
Chapter 33 Command Examples
This command shows the general system information (such as the firmware version and system up time). An example is shown next. sysname# show system-information
System Name : VES-1616F-35
System Contact :
System Location :
Ethernet Address : 00:13:49:00:00:02
ZyNOS F/W Version : V3.60(AIH.0)C0 | 01/25/2007
RomRasSize : 3364912
System up Time : 0:28:28 (29b44 ticks)
Bootbase Version : V0.1 | 06/05/2006
ZyNOS CODE : RAS Jan 19 2007 19:22:28
Product Model : VES-1616F-35 sysname#
33.2.7 show vdsl-alarmprofile
Syntax: show vdsl-alarmprofile [<profile-name>]
This command displays a summary list of VDSL alarm profiles or displays the settings of a
VDSL alarm profile. The following example shows the summary table. sysname# show vdsl-alarmprofile
Name LOSs ESs SESs InitFailure Applied Ports
======================================================================
DEFVAL 0 0 0 Off 1-16 sysname#
The following example shows the settings of the test alarm profile. sysname# show vdsl-alarmprofile test
Profile Name : test
15Mins LOSs Threshold : 15
15Mins ESs Threshold : 10
15Mins SESs Threshold : 5
Initialization Failure : On sysname#
33.2.8 show vdsl-profile
Syntax: show vdsl-profile [<profile-name>]
246
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 33 Command Examples
This command displays a summary list of VDSL profiles or displays the settings of a VDSL profile. The following example shows the summary table. sysname# show vdsl-profile
Name Payload Rate SNR Margin Applied Ports
===========================================================================
DEFVAL 104M/104M 6/6 1-16
test 104M/104M 6/6 sysname#
The following example shows the settings of the test VDSL profile. sysname# show vdsl-profile test
Profile Name: test
| Downstream | Upstream
--------------------------+------------------------+--------------------
Slow Channel Payload Rate | MAX: 104960 MIN: 64 | MAX: 104960 MIN: 64
Fast Channel Payload Rate | MAX: 104960 MIN: 64 | MAX: 104960 MIN: 64
Rate Adaption | adaptAtInit | adaptAtInit
Max SNR Margin | 31dB | 31dB
Target SNR Margin | 6dB | 6dB
Min SNR Margin | 0dB | 0dB
Max Interleave Delay | 2ms | 2ms
Max Aggregate Power | 14dBm | 14dBm
Rate Raio | 0% | 0%
Impulse Noise Protection | 0ms | 0ms
FEC Redundancy | 0% | 0%
PSD Template Mask | templateMask2 | templateMask2
PBO Control | disabled | disabled
PBO Level | 0dB | 0dB
Band Plan | bandPlan998
Deployment Scenario | fttEx
Compatible Mode | none
Applicable Standard | etsi
Ham Band Mask |
Custom Notch1 Start | 0kHz
Custom Notch1 Stop | 0kHz
Custom Notch2 Start | 0kHz
Custom Notch2 Stop | 0kHz
Optional Band | unused
Line Type | fastOrInterleaved sysname#
33.3 ping
Syntax: ping <ip> < [in-band|out-of-band|vlan <vlan-id> ] [ size <0-8024> ] [ -t ]>
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
247
Chapter 33 Command Examples where
<ip> = The IP address of an Ethernet device.
[in-band|out-ofband|vlan <vlan-id>
]
= Specifies the network interface or the VLAN ID to which the Ethernet device belongs. out-of-band refers the management port while in-band means the other ports on the switch.
[ size <0-8024> ]
[ -t ]
= Specifies the packet size to send.
= Sends Ping packets to the Ethernet device indefinitely.
Click [CTRL]+ C to terminate the Ping process.
This command sends Ping packets to an Ethernet device. The following example sends Ping requests to and displays the replies from an Ethernet device with an IP address of
192.168.1.100
. sysname# ping 192.168.1.100
sent rcvd rate rtt avg mdev max min reply from
1 1 100 0 0 0 0 0 192.168.1.100
2 2 100 0 0 0 0 0 192.168.1.100
3 3 100 0 0 0 0 0 192.168.1.100
sysname#
33.4 traceroute
Syntax: traceroute <ip> [in-band|out-of-band|vlan <vlan-id>][ttl <1-255>] [wait <1-
60>] [queries <1-10>] where
<ip> =
[in-band|out-ofband|vlan <vlanid> ]
[ttl <1-255>]
=
=
[wait <1-60>] =
[quesries <1-10>] =
The IP address of an Ethernet device.
Specifies the network interface or the VLAN ID to which the
Ethernet device belongs.
Specifies the Time To Live (TTL) period.
Specifies the time period to wait.
Specifies how many tries the switch performs the traceroute function.
248
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 33 Command Examples
This command displays information about the route to an Ethernet device. The following example displays route information to an Ethernet device with an IP address of
192.168.1.100
. sysname> traceroute 192.168.1.100
traceroute to 192.168.1.100, 30 hops max, 40 byte packet
1:192.168.1.100 (10 ms) (10 ms) (0 ms) traceroute done:
33.5 Enabling RSTP
Syntax: snapping-tree [port-number]
To enable RSTP on a port. Enter spanning-tree followed by the port number and press
[ENTER]
. The following example enables RSTP on port 17. sysname(config)# spanning-tree 17 sysname#
33.6 vdsl-port Command
Syntax: vdsl-port <port-list> profilename <name-str> where
<port-list>
<name-str>
=
=
Selects the VDSL port(s) (port 1 to 16).
Specifies the name of the VDSL profile.
This command sets the specified VDSL port(s) to use a VDSL profile. The following example configures VDSL ports 1 to 5 to use the test VDSL profile. sysname(config)# vdsl-port 1-5 profilename test
33.7 Configuration File Maintenance
This section shows you how to backup or restore the configuration file on the switch using
TFTP.
33.7.1 Backing up Configuration
Syntax: copy running-config tftp <ip> <remote-file>
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
249
Chapter 33 Command Examples where
<ip> =
<remote-file> =
The IP address of a TFTP server on which you want to store the backup configuration file.
Specifies the name of the configuration file.
This command backs up the current configuration file on a TFTP server. The following example backs up the current configuration to a file ( test.cfg
) on the TFTP server
( 172.23.19.96
). sysname# copy running-config tftp 172.23.19.96 test.cfg
Backuping
. (683)Bytes Done!
sysname#
33.7.2 Restoring Configuration
Syntax: copy tftp config <index> <ip> <remote-file> where
<index> =
<ip> =
<remote-file> =
Specifies to restore which configuration file (1) on the Switch.
The IP address of a TFTP server from which you want to get the backup configuration file.
Specified the name of the configuration file.
This command restores a configuration file on the switch. The following example uploads the configuration file ( test.cfg
) from the TFTP server ( 172.23.19.96
) to the switch. sysname# copy tftp config 1 172.23.19.96 test.cfg
Restoring
. (683)Bytes Done!
sysname#
33.7.3 Resetting to the Factory Default
Follow the steps below to reset the switch back to the factory defaults.
1 Enter erase running config to reset the current running configuration.
2 Enter write memory to save the changes to the current configuration file.
The following example resets both configuration files to the factory default settings. sysname# erase running-config sysname# write memory
250
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 33 Command Examples
33.8 no Command Examples
These are the commonly used command examples that belong to the no group of commands.
33.8.1 no mirror port
Syntax: no mirror-port
Disables port mirroring on the switch.
An example is shown next. sysname(config)# no mirror-port
33.8.2 no https timeout
Syntax: no https timeout
Resets the https session timeout to default.
An example is shown next. The session timeout is reset to 300 seconds. sysname(config)# no https timeout
Cache timeout 300
33.8.3 no trunk
Syntax: no trunk <T1> no trunk <T1> lacp no trunk <T1> interface <port-list> where
<T1>
<T1> lacp
<T1> interface <port-list>
Disables the trunk group.
Disables LACP in the trunk group.
Removes ports from the trunk group.
• An example is shown next.
• Disable the trunk group.
• Disable LAPC on the trunk group.
• Remove ports 17 and 18 from the trunk group. sysname(config)# no trunk T1 sysname(config)# no trunk T1 lacp sysname(config)# no trunk T1 interface 17, 18
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
251
Chapter 33 Command Examples
33.8.4 no port-access-authenticator
Syntax: no port-access-authenticator no port-access-authenticator <port-list> reauthenticate no port-access-authenticator <port-list> where
<port-list> reauthenticate
<port-list>
= Disables port authentication on the switch.
= Disables the re-authentication mechanism on the listed port(s).
= Disables authentication on the listed ports.
An example is shown next.
• Disable authentication on the switch.
• Disable re-authentication on ports one, three, four and five.
• Disable authentication on ports one, six and seven.
sysname(config)# no port-access-authenticator sysname(config)# no port-access-authenticator 1,3-5 reauthenticate sysname(config)# no port-access-authenticator 1,6-7
33.8.5 no ssh
Syntax: no ssh key <rsa1|rsa|dsa> no ssh known-hosts <host-ip> no ssh known-hosts <host-ip> [1024|ssh-rsa|ssh-dsa] where key <rsa1|rsa|dsa> Disables the secure shell server encryption key. Your switch supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA and DSA authentication.
known-hosts <host-ip> Remove specific remote hosts from the list of all known hosts.
known-hosts <host-ip>
[1024|ssh-rsa|ssh-dsa]
Remove remote known hosts with a specified public key
(1024-bit RSA1, RSA or DSA).
An example is shown next.
• Disable the secure shell RSA1 encryption key.
• Remove the remote host with IP address 172.165.1.8 from the list of known hosts.
252
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 33 Command Examples
• Remove the remote host with IP address 172.165.1.9 and with an SSH-RSA encryption key from the list of known hosts. sysname(config)# no ssh key rsa1 sysname(config)# no ssh known-hosts 172.165.1.8
sysname(config)# no ssh known-hosts 172.165.1.9 ssh-rsa
33.9 interface Commands
These are some commonly used commands that belong to the interface group of commands.
33.9.1 interface port-channel
Syntax: interface port-channel <port-list>
Use this command to enable the specified ports for configuration. Type multiple ports or port ranges separated by a comma. Ranges of port numbers are typed separated by a dash.
The following example shows you how to access the interface command mode to configure ports 1, 3, 4 and 5.
• Enter the configuration mode.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Begin configuring for those ports. sysname# config sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)#
33.9.2 bpdu-control
Syntax: bpdu-control <peer|tunnel|discard|network> where
<peer|tunnel|discard|network
>
= Type peer to process any BPDUs received on these ports.
Type tunnel to forward BPDUs received on these ports.
Type discard to drop any BPDUs received on these ports.
Type network to process and forward
BPDUs with a VLAN tag and to process untagged BPDUs.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
253
Chapter 33 Command Examples
An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Set the BPDU control to tunnel , to forward BPDUs received on ports one, three, four and five. sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)# bpdu-control tunnel sysname(config-interface)#
33.9.3 broadcast-limit
Syntax: broadcast-limit broadcast-limit <pkt/s> where
<pkt/s>
Enables broadcast storm control limit on the switch.
Sets how many broadcast packets the interface receives per second.
An example is shown next.
• Enable port one for configuration.
• Enable broadcast control.
• Set the number of broadband packets the interface receives per second. sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1 sysname(config-interface)# broadcast-limit sysname(config-interface)# broadcast-limit 21
33.9.4 bandwidth-limit
Syntax: bandwidth-limit bandwidth-limit egress <Kbps> bandwidth-limit ingress <Kbps> where
<Kbps>
Enables bandwidth control on the switch.
Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for outgoing traffic (egress) or incoming traffic (ingress) on the switch.
An example is shown next.
• Enable port one for configuration.
• Enable bandwidth control.
• Set the outgoing traffic bandwidth limit to 7Mbps.
254
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 33 Command Examples
• Set the incoming traffic bandwidth limit to 9Mbps. sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1 sysname(config-interface)# bandwidth-limit sysname(config-interface)# bandwidth-limit egress 7000 sysname(config-interface)# bandwidth-limit ingress 9000
33.9.5 mirror
Syntax: mirror mirror dir <ingress|egress|both> where
<ingress|egress|both>
Enables port mirroring on the interface.
= Enables port mirroring for incoming, outgoing or both incoming and outgoing traffic.
Port mirroring copies traffic from one or all ports to another or all ports for external analysis.
An example is shown next.
• Enable port mirroring.
• Enable the monitor port three.
• Enable ports one, four, five and six for configuration.
• Enable port mirroring on the ports.
• Enable port mirroring for outgoing traffic. Traffic is copied from ports one, four, five and six to port three in order to examine it in more detail without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port(s). sysname(config)# mirror sysname(config)# mirror monitor-port 3 sysname(config)# mirror mirroed-port 1 sysname(config)# mirror mirroed-port 4 sysname(config)# mirror mirroed-port 5 sysname(config)# mirror mirroed-port 6 sysname(config-interface)# mirror dir egress
33.9.6 gvrp
Syntax: gvrp
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network. Enable this function to permit VLANs groups beyond the local switch.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
255
Chapter 33 Command Examples
An example is shown next.
• Enable the IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN command to configure tagged VLAN for the switch.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Enable GVRP on the interface. sysname(config)# vlan1q gvrp sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)# gvrp
33.9.7 ingress-check
Syntax: ingress-check
Enables the device to discard incoming frames for VLANs that are not included in a port member set.
An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Enable ingress checking on the interface. sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)# ingress-check
33.9.8 frame-type
Syntax: frame-type <all|tagged|untagged> where
<all|tagged|u ntagged>
Choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames or just tagged or untagged incoming frames on a port.
An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Enable ingress checking on the ports.
• Enable tagged frame-types on the interface. sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)# ingress-check sysname(config-interface)# frame-type tagged
33.9.9 egress set
Syntax: egress set <port-list>
256
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 33 Command Examples where
<port-list> Sets the outgoing traffic port list for a port-based VLAN.
An example is shown next.
• Enable port-based VLAN tagging on the switch.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Set the outgoing traffic ports as the CPU (0), seven (7), eight (8) and nine (9).
sysname(config)# vlan-type port-based sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)# egress set 0,7-9
33.9.10 qos priority
Syntax: qos priority <0 .. 7> where
<0 .. 7> Sets the quality of service priority for a port.
An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Set the IEEE 802.1p quality of service priority as four (4). sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)# qos priority 4
33.9.11 name
Syntax: name <port-name-string> where
<port-name-string> Sets a name for your port interface(s).
An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Set a name for the ports. sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)# name Test
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
257
Chapter 33 Command Examples
33.9.12 speed-duplex
Syntax: speed-duplex <auto|10-half|10-full|100-half|100-full|1000-full> where
<auto|10-half|10full|100-half|100full|1000-full>
Sets the duplex mode (half or full) and speed (10, 100 or 1000
Mbps) of the connection on the port. Selecting auto (autonegotiation) makes one port able to negotiate with a peer automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support.
An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Set the speed to 10 Mbps in half duplex mode. sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)# speed-duplex 10-half
258
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 34
IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN
Commands
This chapter describes the IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN and associated commands.
34.1 Configuring Tagged VLAN
for background information on VLANs.
The following procedure shows you how to configure tagged VLAN.
1 Use the IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN commands to configure tagged VLAN for the switch.
• Use the vlan <vlan-id> command to configure or create a VLAN on the switch. The switch automatically enters the config-vlan mode. Use the inactive command to deactivate the VLAN(s).
• Use the interface port-channel <port-list> command to enter the configinterface mode to set the VLAN settings on a port, then use the pvid <vlan-id> command to set the VLAN ID you created for the port-list to that specific port in the PVID table.
• Use the exit command when you are finished configuring the VLAN.
Example: sysname(config)# vlan 2000 sysname(config-vlan)# name up1 sysname(config-vlan)# fixed 10-12 sysname(config-vlan)# no untagged 10-12 sysname(config-vlan)# exit sysname(config)# interface port-channel 10-12 sysname(config-interface)# pvid 2000 sysname(config-interface)# exit
2 Configure your management VLAN.
• Use the vlan <vlan-id> command to create a VLAN (VID 3 in this example) for managing the switch, and the switch will activate the new management VLAN.
• Use the inactive command to disable the new management VLAN.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
259
Chapter 34 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands
Example: sysname(config)# vlan 3 sysname(config-vlan)# inactive
34.2 Global VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configuration Commands
This section shows you how to configure and monitor the IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN.
34.2.1 GARP Status
Syntax:
show garp
This command shows the switch’s GARP timer settings, including the join, leave and leave all timers.
An example is shown next. sysname# show garp
GARP Timer
------------------------
Join Timer = 200
Leave Timer = 600
Leave All Timer = 10000 sysname#
34.2.2 GARP Timer
Syntax: garp join <msec> leave <msec> leaveall <msec> where join <msec> leave <msec>
= This sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a Join Period timer. The allowed Join
Time range is between 100 and 32767 milliseconds; the default is
200 milliseconds.
= This sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a single Leave Period timer. Leave
Time must be two times larger than Join Timer; the default is 600 milliseconds.
leaveall
<msec>
= This sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a single Leave All Period timer. Leave
All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer; the default is 10000 milliseconds.
260
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 34 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands
This command sets the switch’s GARP timer settings, including the join, leave and leave all timers.
Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leave All message terminates all registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values.
The following example sets the Join Timer to 300 milliseconds, the Leave Timer to 800 milliseconds and the Leave All Timer to 11000 milliseconds. sysname(config)# garp join 300 leave 800 leaveall 11000
34.2.3 GVRP Timer
Syntax: show vlan1q gvrp
This command shows the switch’s GVRP settings.
An example is shown next. sysname# show vlan1q gvrp
GVRP Support
--------------------gvrpEnable = YES
GVRP Support
34.2.4 Enable GVRP
Syntax:
vlan1q gvrp
This command turns on GVRP in order to propagate VLAN information beyond the switch.
34.2.5 Disable GVRP
Syntax:
no vlan1q gvrp
This command turns off GVRP so that the switch does not propagate VLAN information to other switches.
34.3 Port VLAN Commands
You must configure the switch port VLAN settings in config-interface mode.
34.3.1 Set Port VID
Syntax: pvid <VID>
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
261
Chapter 34 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands where
<VID> = Specifies the VLAN number between 1 and 4094
This command sets the default VLAN ID on the port(s).
The following example sets the default VID to 200 on ports 1 to 5. sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1-5 sysname(config-interface)# pvid 200
34.3.2 Set Acceptable Frame Type
Syntax: frame-type <all|tagged> where
<all|tagged> = Specifies all Ethernet frames (tagged and untagged) or only tagged
Ethernet frames.
This command sets the specified port to accept all Ethernet frames or only those with an IEEE
802.1Q VLAN tag.
The following example sets ports 1 to 5 to accept only tagged frames. sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1-5 sysname(config-interface)# frame-type tagged
34.3.3 Enable or Disable Port GVRP
Use the gvrp command to enable GVRP on the port(s). Use the no gvrp command to disable
GVRP.
The following example turns off GVRP for ports 1 to 5. sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1-5 sysname(config-interface)# no gvrp
34.3.4 Modify Static VLAN
Use the following commands in the config-vlan mode to configure the static VLAN table.
262
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 34 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands
Syntax: vlan <vlan-id> fixed <port-list> forbidden <port-list> name <name-str> normal <port-list> untagged <port-list> no fixed <port-list> no forbidden <port-list> no untagged <port-list> where
<vlan-id> =
<name-str> =
<port-list> =
The VLAN ID [1 – 4094].
A name to identify the SVLAN entry.
This is the switch port list.
• Enter fixed to register the <port-list> to the static VLAN table with <vlan-id> .
• Enter normal to confirm registration of the <port-list> to the static VLAN table with
<vlan-id> .
• Enter forbidden to block a <port-list> from joining the static VLAN table with
<vlan-id> .
• Enter no fixed or no forbidden to change <port-list> to normal status.
• Enter untagged to send outgoing frames without a tag.
• Enter no untagged to tag outgoing frames.
The following example configures ports 1 to 5 as fixed and untagged ports in VLAN 2000. sysname(config)# vlan 2000 sysname(config-vlan)# fixed 1-5 sysname(config-vlan)# untagged 1-5
34.3.5 Forwarding Process Example
34.3.5.1 Tagged Frames
1 First the switch checks the VLAN ID (VID) of tagged frames or assigns temporary VIDs to untagged frames.
2 The switch then checks the VID in a frame’s tag against the SVLAN table.
3 The switch notes what the SVLAN table says (that is, the SVLAN tells the switch whether or not to forward a frame and if the forwarded frames should have tags).
4 Then the switch applies the port filter to finish the forwarding decision. This means that frames may be dropped even if the SVLAN says to forward them. Frames might also be dropped if they are sent to a CPE (customer premises equipment) DSL device that does not accept tagged frames.
34.3.5.2 Untagged Frames
1 An untagged frame comes in from the LAN.
2 The switch checks the PVID table and assigns a temporary VID of 1.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
263
Chapter 34 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands
3 The switch ignores the port from which the frame came, because the switch does not send a frame to the port from which it came. The switch also does not forward frames to
“forbidden” ports.
4 If after looking at the SVLAN, the switch does not have any ports to which it will send the frame, it won’t check the port filter.
34.4 Delete VLAN ID
Syntax: no vlan <vlan-id> where
<vlan-id> = The VLAN ID [1 – 4094].
This command deletes the specified VLAN ID entry from the static VLAN table. The following example deletes entry 2 in the static VLAN table. sysname(config)# no vlan 2
34.5 Enable VLAN
Syntax: vlan <vlan-id>
This command enables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN (Static VLAN) table.
34.6 Disable VLAN
Syntax: vlan <vlan-id> inactive
This command disables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN (Static VLAN) table.
34.7 Show VLAN Setting
Syntax: show vlan
This command shows the IEEE 802.1Q Tagged SVLAN (Static VLAN) table.
264
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 34 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands
An example is shown next. sysname# show vlan
The Number of VLAN : 2
Idx. VID Status Elap-Time TagCtl
---- ---- --------- ----------- --------------------------------------
1 1 Static 0:54:40 Untagged :1-18
Tagged :
2 2 Static 0:54:41 Untagged :
Tagged : sysname#
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
265
Chapter 34 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands
266
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 35
Troubleshooting
This chapter covers potential problems and possible remedies.
35.1 Problems Starting Up the Switch
Table 87 Troubleshooting the Start-Up of Your Switch
PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION
None of the LEDs turn on when you turn on the switch.
Check the power connection and make sure the power source is turned on.
If the error persists, you may have a hardware problem. In this case, you should contact your vendor.
35.2 Problems Accessing the Switch
Table 88 Troubleshooting Accessing the Switch
PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION
I cannot access the switch using
Telnet.
I cannot access the web configurator.
Make sure the ports are properly connected.
You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions. Close other Telnet session(s) or try connecting again later.
Check that you have enabled Telnet service access. If you have configured a secured client IP address, your computer’s IP address must match it. Refer to the chapter on access control for details.
The administrator username is “admin”. The default administrator password is “1234”.
The username and password are case-sensitive. Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the proper casing. If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it, you will need to upload the default configuration file. This restores all of the factory defaults including the password.
If you have configured more than one IP interface, make sure another administrator is
NOT logged into the web configurator on a different IP interface using the same account.
Check that you have enabled web service access. If you have configured a secured client IP address, your computer’s IP address must match it. Refer to the chapter on access control for details.
Your computer’s and the switch’s IP addresses must be on the same subnet.
See the following section to check that pop-up windows, JavaScripts and Java permissions are allowed.
267
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
268
Chapter 35 Troubleshooting
35.3 Problem with the VDSL Connection
Table 89 Troubleshooting VDSL Connection
PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION
The VDSL link is down.
Cannot send traffic over the
VDSL link.
Make sure the VDSL port is activated.
Check the port connection. Make sure the cable is faulty.
The VDSL port may be faulty. Try connecting to a different VDSL port on the switch.
The target transmission rate(s) may be too high. Set the switch to use a lower link transmission rate.
The CPE device may be faulty. Try connecting another CPE device to the VDSL port.
Make sure the VDSL port is activated and that the physical link status is up.
Check that the traffic on this VDSL port is not blocked by the filter settings on the switch.
Check the MAC address learning limitation on the VDSL port. Make sure the maximum number of MAC address is not reached or turn off this feature.
Make sure the VDSL client IP address is configured correctly.
Check the VLAN settings on the switch. Make sure the VLAN group, VLAN ID and egress settings are correct on the VDSL port.
35.3.1 Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
"
Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary.
35.3.1.1 Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers
You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device.
Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device’s IP address.
35.3.1.1.1 Disable pop-up Blockers
1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up
Blocker.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 35 Troubleshooting
Figure 108 Pop-up Blocker
You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the
Privacy tab.
1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy.
2 Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled.
Figure 109 Internet Options
3 Click Apply to save this setting.
35.3.1.1.2 Enable pop-up Blockers with Exceptions
Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps.
1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab.
2 Select Settings…to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
269
Chapter 35 Troubleshooting
Figure 110 Internet Options
3 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.1.1.
4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites.
Figure 111 Pop-up Blocker Settings
270
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 35 Troubleshooting
5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen.
6 Click Apply to save this setting.
35.3.1.2 JavaScripts
If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that
JavaScripts are allowed.
1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
Figure 112 Internet Options
2 Click the Custom Level... button.
3 Scroll down to Scripting.
4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
6 Click OK to close the window.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
271
Chapter 35 Troubleshooting
Figure 113 Security Settings - Java Scripting
35.3.1.3 Java Permissions
1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
2 Click the Custom Level... button.
3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM.
4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected.
5 Click OK to close the window.
Figure 114 Security Settings - Java
272
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 35 Troubleshooting
35.3.1.3.1 JAVA (Sun)
1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab.
2 make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected.
3 Click OK to close the window.
Figure 115 Java (Sun)
35.4 Problems with the Password
Table 90 Troubleshooting the Password
PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION
Cannot access the switch.
The password field is case sensitive. Make sure that you enter the correct password using the proper casing.
The administrator username is “admin”. The default administrator password is
“1234”. The username and password are case-sensitive. Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the proper casing.
If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it, you will need to upload the default configuration file. This restores all of the factory defaults including the password.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
273
Chapter 35 Troubleshooting
274
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 36
Product Specifications
These are the switch product specifications.
Table 91 Product Specifications
General Product Specifications
Standards
VDSL
Interfaces
IEEE802.3 10BASE-T Ethernet (twisted-pair copper)
IEEE802.3u 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet (twisted-pair copper)
ANSI/IEEE802.3 Auto-negotiation
IEEE802.3x Flow Control
IEEE802.1p Priority Queues
IEEE802.1Q Tagged VLAN
One Telco connector for16 VDSL or POTS/ISDN lines
Duplex Method: DMT/FDD
Band Plan: 998
Tone spacing: 4.3125 - 8.625 KHz +/- 50 ppm
Upstream speed: 100 Mbps or 50 Mbps (VDSL1) or 30 Mbps (VDSL2)
Downstream speed: 100 Mbps (VDSL1) or 50 Mbps (VDSL2)
Optional band: 25 ~ 138 K (VES-1616F-34), 138 ~ 276 K (VES-1616F-35)
Two Gigabit/mini-GBIC uplink ports
One Console port (DB-9 female)
Telco 50 (for VDSL and POTS/ISDN lines)
Performance and Management Specifications
VDSL Fixed Rate and Rate Adaptive.
Power back off
Interleave delay setting
RFI configuration
Resynchronization
Diagnostics
Capabilities
VLAN
The switch can perform self-diagnostic tests. These tests check the operation of the following circuits:
FLASH memory
DRAM
LAN port local and remote loopback test
Per VDSL port loopback test
HTP items
IEEE 802.1Q tag-based VLAN, 4094 Max
Port-based VLAN
Up to 256 VLAN groups
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR): 3 groups
275
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 36 Product Specifications
Table 91 Product Specifications (continued)
Security Static MAC address forward
MAC address learning: 10 per port
Block unresolved address forwarding/Port security
802.1x port authentication
Multicasting
Bridging
Switching
QoS
STP
Support IGMP snooping and filtering
IGMP V1 and V2 (RFC2236 and RFC112)
16K MAC addresses learning
Static MAC address forwarding, 256 entries
Broadcast storm control
Automatic address learning and aging
Aging time from 10 to 765 seconds in 1 second increment (default 300 seconds)
Transparent bridging
6.4 Gbps, non-blocking
Maximum frame size: 1522 bytes including tag/CRC
Store and forward
IEEE 802.1p
Eight priority queues
Queuing Algorithm: SP/WFS
Port-based bandwidth control from 100Kbps to 100Mbps (by 1518bytes packets)
DiffServ (RFC 2475)
IEEE 802.1d
IEEE 802.1w
Port Mirroring Port based mirroring to a monitor port
Broadcast Storm Support broadcast storm control
Port Aggregation One aggregation group
LACP support
DHCP DCHP server/relay
DHCP relay Option82
System
Management
Configuration via console/telnet/web
Firmware upgrade via FTP/web/console
Configuration backup and restore via FTP/web/console
System management access control
Multi-login, single management.
System clock: manual setup or NTP
SNMP v2c
RMON group 1,2,3,9
ICMP echo/echo reply
CPE Device
Management
Management
Security
Remote CPE firmware upgrade via the web configurator
Remote CPE line reset/retrain
User ID/Password for Telnet and Web-based management authentication
Up to five login accounts.
276
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 36 Product Specifications
Table 91 Product Specifications (continued)
MIBs RFC1213
RFC1493 Bridge MIB
RFC1643 Ethernet MIB
RFC1757 RMON
RFC1155 SMI
RFC 2233 ifVHCPacketGroup
RFC 2647 Bridge MIB extension (for 802.1Q)
RFC 2925 PING-MIB and TRACEROUTE-MIB
RFC 3728 VDSL line MIB
Physical and Environmental Specifications
Weight < 8kg
Power Suplpy
Power
Consumption
100 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz AC
75 W (max.)
Temperature
Threshold
Three temperature sensors:
T1 (VDSL Chipset): 81 °C ON; 60 °C OFF
T2 (Switch): 73 °C ON; 65 °C OFF
T3 (Monitor chipset): 88 °C ON; 60 °C OFF
Voltage Threshold Four voltages:
2.5V: +- 6%
1.2V: +- 6%
3.5V: +- 6%
12V: +- 6%
0 ~ 50°C Operating
Temperature
Storage
Temperature
-25 ~ 70°C
Operational
Humidity
Safety
10 ~ 90% (non-condensing)
EMC
UL60950-1
CSA60950-1
EN60950 -1
IEC60950-1
ITU-T K.20 (Version 2000)
CE-EMC Class A
FCC Part 15 Class A
The following table lists the splitter board specifications.
Table 92 CO Impedance Splitter Board Specifications
COUNTRY POTS
Belgium 270 Ω+ (750Ω//150nF)
Taiwan 900 Ω
Denmark 270 Ω+ (750Ω//150nF)
Finland 270 Ω+ (750Ω//150nF)
France 270 Ω+ (750Ω//150nF)
Germany 220 Ω + (820Ω//115nF)
Iceland 270 Ω+ (750Ω//150nF)
ISDN
135 Ω (2B1Q)
None (POTS only)
None (POTS only)
None (POTS only)
135 Ω (2B1Q)
150 Ω (4B3T)
None (POTS only)
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
277
Chapter 36 Product Specifications
Table 92 CO Impedance Splitter Board Specifications (continued)
COUNTRY POTS
Netherlands 270 Ω+ (750Ω//150nF)
Norway 270 Ω+ (750Ω//150nF)
Russia 600 Ω
Sweden 270 Ω+ (750Ω//150nF)
Swiss 270 Ω+ (750Ω//150nF)
UK 320 Ω + (1050Ω//230nF)
ISDN
135 Ω (2B1Q)
135 Ω (2B1Q)
None (POTS only)
None (POTS only)
135 Ω (2B1Q)
None (POTS only)
USA 900 only)
Hardware Telco-50 Connector Pin Assignments
The following table and diagram show the pin assignments of the Telco-50 connectors on the switch.
Table 93 Hardware Telco-50 Pin Assignments
VDSL POTS/ISDN
PIN1 P+PORT16 PIN26 NULL PIN1 P+PORT16 PIN26 NULL
PIN2
PIN3
PIN4
PIN5
PIN6
PIN7
PIN8
P-PORT16
NULL
P+PORT14
P-PORT14
NULL
P+PORT12
P-PORT12
PIN9 NULL
PIN10 P+PORT10
PIN11 P-PORT10
PIN12 NULL
PIN13 P+PORT8
PIN14 P-PORT8
PIN15 NULL
PIN16 P+PORT6
PIN17 P-PORT6
PIN18 NULL
PIN19 P+PORT4
PIN20 P-PORT4
PIN21 NULL
PIN22 P+PORT2
PIN23 P-PORT2
PIN27 P+PORT15
PIN28 P-PORT15
PIN29 NULL
PIN30 P+PORT13
PIN31 P-PORT13
PIN32 NULL
PIN33 P+PORT11
PIN34 P-PORT11
PIN35 NULL
PIN36 P+PORT9
PIN37 P-PORT9
PIN38 NULL
PIN39 P+PORT7
PIN40 P-PORT7
PIN41 NULL
PIN42 P+PORT5
PIN43 P-PORT5
PIN44 NULL
PIN45 P+PORT3
PIN46 P-PORT3
PIN47 NULL
PIN48 P+PORT1
PIN2
PIN3
PIN4
PIN5
PIN6
PIN7
PIN8
P-PORT16
NULL
P+PORT14
P-PORT14
NULL
P+PORT12
P-PORT12
PIN9 NULL
PIN10 P+PORT10
PIN11 P-PORT10
PIN12 NULL
PIN13 P+PORT8
PIN14 P-PORT8
PIN15 NULL
PIN16 P+PORT6
PIN17 P-PORT6
PIN18 NULL
PIN19 P+PORT4
PIN20 P-PORT4
PIN21 NULL
PIN22 P+PORT2
PIN23 P-PORT2
PIN27 P+PORT15
PIN28 P-PORT15
PIN29 NULL
PIN30 P+PORT13
PIN31 P-PORT13
PIN32 NULL
PIN33 P+PORT11
PIN34 P-PORT11
PIN35 NULL
PIN36 P+PORT9
PIN37 P-PORT9
PIN38 NULL
PIN39 P+PORT7
PIN40 P-PORT7
PIN41 NULL
PIN42 P+PORT5
PIN43 P-PORT5
PIN44 NULL
PIN45 P+PORT3
PIN46 P-PORT3
PIN47 NULL
PIN48 P+PORT1
278
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 36 Product Specifications
Table 93 Hardware Telco-50 Pin Assignments
PIN24 NULL PIN49 P-PORT1 PIN24 NULL
PIN25 NULL PIN50 NULL PIN25 NULL
Figure 116 Hardware Telco-50 Pin Assignments
PIN49 P-PORT1
PIN50 NULL
This table lists the ports and matching pin numbers for the hardware Telco-50 connector.
Table 94 Hardware Telco-50 Connector Port and Pin Numbers
VDSL PORT NUMBER PIN NUMBER
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
11
12
13
48, 49
22, 23
45, 46
19, 20
42, 43
16, 17
39, 40
13, 14
36, 37
10, 11
33, 34
7, 8
30, 31
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
279
Chapter 36 Product Specifications
Table 94 Hardware Telco-50 Connector Port and Pin Numbers (continued)
VDSL PORT NUMBER PIN NUMBER
14
15
16
4, 5
27, 28
1, 2
Telco-50 Cable Telco-50 Connector Pin Assignments
Use Telco-50 cables to connect the VDSL LINE port to the user equipment (VDSL modem) and the POTS/ISDN LINE port to the central office switch or PBX (Private Branch
Exchange). The following diagram shows the pin assignments that you need to have on the
Telco-50 connectors on the Telco-50 cables.
Figure 117 Telco-50 Cable VDSL Telco-50 Pin Assignments
Figure 118 Telco-50 Cable POTS/ISDN Telco-50 Pin Assignments
280
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Chapter 36 Product Specifications
Console Cable Pin Assignments
In a serial communications connection, generally a computer is DTE (Data Terminal
Equipment) and a modem is DCE (Data Circuit-terminating Equipment). The Switch is DCE when you connect a computer to the console port. The following diagrams and chart show the pin assignments of the console cable.
The pin layout for the DB-9 connector end of the cables is as follows.
Figure 119 Console Cable DB-9 End Pin Layout
Table 95 Console Port Pin Assignments
CONSOLE Port RS – 232 (Female) DB-9F
Pin 1 = NON
Pin 2 = DCE-TXD
Pin 3 = DCE –RXD
Pin 4 = DCE –DSR
Pin 5 = GND
Pin 6 = DCE –DTR
Pin 7 = DCE –CTS
Pin 8 = DCE –RTS
PIN 9 = NON
DIAL BACKUP RS – 232 (Male) DB-9M
Pin 1 = NON
Pin 2 = DTE-RXD
Pin 3 = DTE-TXD
Pin 4 = DTE-DTR
Pin 5 = GND
Pin 6 = DTE-DSR
Pin 7 = DTE-RTS
Pin 8 = DTE-CTS
PIN 9 = NON.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
281
Chapter 36 Product Specifications
282
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
P
ART
VIII
Appendices and
Index
"
The appendices provide general information. Some details may not apply to your Switch.
283
284
A P P E N D I X A
IP Addresses and Subnetting
This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks.
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
Introduction to IP Addresses
One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered.
Structure
An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example,
192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation).
Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in decimal.
The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets (192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID.
285
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
Figure 120 Network Number and Host ID
How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask.
Subnet Masks
A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term “subnet” is short for “subnetwork”.
A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a “1” then the corresponding bit in the
IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is “0” then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID.
The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal).
Table 96 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example
1ST
OCTET:
(192)
2ND
OCTET:
(168)
3RD
OCTET:
(1)
4TH OCTET
(2)
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask (Binary)
Network Number
Host ID
11000000
11111111
11000000
10101000
11111111
10101000
00000001
11111111
00000001
00000010
00000000
00000010
By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of
32 bits.
Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a “1” value). For example, an “8-bit mask” means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes.
286
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks.
Table 97 Subnet Masks
BINARY
DECIMAL
1ST
OCTET
2ND
OCTET
3RD
OCTET
4TH OCTET
8-bit mask 11111111
16-bit mask 11111111
24-bit mask 11111111
29-bit mask 11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
00000000
11111000
255.0.0.0
255.255.0.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.248
Network Size
The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits.
An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network (192.168.1.0 with a
24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example).
As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows:
Table 98 Maximum Host Numbers
SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS
8 bits 255.0.0.0
16 bits 255.255.0.0
24 bits 255.255.255.0
24 bits
16 bits
8 bits
29 bits 255.255.255.248 3 bits
2
24
– 2
2
16
– 2
2
8
– 2
2
3
– 2
16777214
65534
254
6
Notation
Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a “/” followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address.
For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask
255.255.255.128.
The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations.
Table 99 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation
SUBNET MASK
ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION
LAST OCTET
(BINARY)
LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
255.255.255.0
/24
255.255.255.128
/25
0000 0000
1000 0000
0
128
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
287
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 99 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation (continued)
SUBNET MASK
ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION
LAST OCTET
(BINARY)
LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
255.255.255.192
/26
255.255.255.224
/27
255.255.255.240
/28
255.255.255.248
/29
255.255.255.252
/30
1100 0000
1110 0000
1111 0000
1111 1000
1111 1100
192
224
240
248
252
Subnetting
You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons.
In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address (192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 2
8
– 2 or 254 possible hosts.
The following figure shows the company network before subnetting.
Figure 121 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting
288
You can “borrow” one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate sub-networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or /25).
The “borrowed” host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets;
192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25.
The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two subnetworks, A and B.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Figure 122 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 2 7 – 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet’s address itself, all ones is the subnet’s broadcast address).
192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask
255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126.
Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254.
Example: Four Subnets
The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to “borrow” two host
ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits
(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192.
Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 2
6
- 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnet’s broadcast address).
Table 100 Subnet 1
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address (Decimal)
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask (Binary)
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63
192.168.1.
11000000.10101000.00000001.
11111111.11111111.11111111.
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62
0
00000000
11000000
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
289
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 101 Subnet 2
IP/SUBNET MASK
IP Address
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask (Binary)
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127
Table 102 Subnet 3
IP/SUBNET MASK
IP Address
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask (Binary)
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191
Table 103 Subnet 4
IP/SUBNET MASK
IP Address
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask (Binary)
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255
NETWORK NUMBER
192.168.1.
11000000.10101000.00000001.
11111111.11111111.11111111.
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126
NETWORK NUMBER
192.168.1.
11000000.10101000.00000001.
11111111.11111111.11111111.
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
64
01000000
11000000
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
128
10000000
11000000
NETWORK NUMBER
192.168.1.
11000000.10101000.00000001.
11111111.11111111.11111111.
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
192
11000000
11000000
Example: Eight Subnets
3
4
1
2
Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and
111).
The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet.
Table 104 Eight Subnets
SUBNET
SUBNET
ADDRESS
FIRST ADDRESS
LAST
ADDRESS
0
32
64
96
1
33
65
97
30
62
94
126
BROADCAST
ADDRESS
31
63
95
127
290
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
7
8
5
6
Table 104 Eight Subnets (continued)
SUBNET
SUBNET
ADDRESS
FIRST ADDRESS
128
160
192
224
129
161
193
225
LAST
ADDRESS
158
190
222
254
BROADCAST
ADDRESS
159
191
223
255
Subnet Planning
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number.
Table 105 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
255.255.255.128 (/25)
255.255.255.192 (/26)
255.255.255.224 (/27)
255.255.255.240 (/28)
255.255.255.248 (/29)
255.255.255.252 (/30)
255.255.255.254 (/31)
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
6
2
1
126
62
30
14
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
11
12
13
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number.
Table 106 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
255.255.128.0 (/17)
255.255.192.0 (/18)
255.255.224.0 (/19)
255.255.240.0 (/20)
255.255.248.0 (/21)
255.255.252.0 (/22)
255.255.254.0 (/23)
255.255.255.0 (/24)
255.255.255.128 (/25)
255.255.255.192 (/26)
255.255.255.224 (/27)
255.255.255.240 (/28)
255.255.255.248 (/29)
32
64
128
256
2
4
8
16
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
126
62
30
14
6
32766
16382
8190
4094
2046
1022
510
254
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
291
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 106 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning (continued)
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS
14
15
255.255.255.252 (/30)
255.255.255.254 (/31)
16384
32768
2
1
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
Configuring IP Addresses
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from
192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the Switch.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your Switch that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your Switch will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the Switch unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
(IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an
ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses.
Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597,
Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP
Address Space.
292
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
IP Address Conflicts
Each device on a network must have a unique IP address. Devices with duplicate IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources. The devices may also be unreachable through the network.
Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example
More than one device can not use the same IP address. In the following example computer A has a static (or fixed) IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client. Neither can access the Internet. This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address automatically.
Figure 123 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example
Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example
Since a router connects different networks, it must have interfaces using different network numbers. For example, if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet (WAN), the router’s
LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets. In the following example, the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet. The LAN computers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks.
Figure 124 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
293
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example
More than one device can not use the same IP address. In the following example, the computer and the router’s LAN port both use 192.168.1.1 as the IP address. The computer cannot access the Internet. This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the router’s LAN port.
Figure 125 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example
294
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
A P P E N D I X B
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2007 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Trademarks
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL
Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.
Certifications
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations.
295
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information
FCC Warning
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
CE Mark Warning:
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Taiwanese BSMI (Bureau of Standards, Metrology and Inspection) A Warning:
Notices
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASS 1
PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11.
PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040.10 ET 1040.11.
Viewing Certifications
1 Go to http://www.zyxel.com
.
2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page.
3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating
296
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return
Material Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of
ZyXEL) and the customer will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
297
Appendix B Legal Information
298
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
A P P E N D I X C
Customer Support
Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support.
Required Information
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +886-3-578-3942
• Fax: +886-3-578-2439
• Web Site: www.zyxel.com, www.europe.zyxel.com
• FTP Site: ftp.zyxel.com, ftp.europe.zyxel.com
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications Corp., 6 Innovation Road II, Science Park,
Hsinchu 300, Taiwan
Costa Rica
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +506-2017878
• Fax: +506-2015098
• Web Site: www.zyxel.co.cr
• FTP Site: ftp.zyxel.co.cr
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Costa Rica, Plaza Roble Escazú, Etapa El Patio, Tercer Piso, San
José, Costa Rica
Czech Republic
• E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +420-241-091-350
• Fax: +420-241-091-359
• Web Site: www.zyxel.cz
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications, Czech s.r.o., Modranská 621, 143 01 Praha 4 -
Modrany, Ceská Republika
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
299
Appendix C Customer Support
Denmark
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +45-39-55-07-00
• Fax: +45-39-55-07-07
• Web Site: www.zyxel.dk
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications A/S, Columbusvej, 2860 Soeborg, Denmark
Finland
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +358-9-4780-8411
• Fax: +358-9-4780 8448
• Web Site: www.zyxel.fi
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications Oy, Malminkaari 10, 00700 Helsinki, Finland
France
• E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +33-4-72-52-97-97
• Fax: +33-4-72-52-19-20
• Web Site: www.zyxel.fr
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL France, 1 rue des Vergers, Bat. 1 / C, 69760 Limonest, France
Germany
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +49-2405-690969
• Fax: +49-2405-6909-99
• Web Site: www.zyxel.de
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH., Adenauerstr. 20/A2 D-52146, Wuerselen,
Germany
Hungary
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +36-1-3361649
• Fax: +36-1-3259100
• Web Site: www.zyxel.hu
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Hungary, 48, Zoldlomb Str., H-1025, Budapest, Hungary
Kazakhstan
• Support: http://zyxel.kz/support
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
300
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Appendix C Customer Support
• Telephone: +7-3272-590-698
• Fax: +7-3272-590-689
• Web Site: www.zyxel.kz
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Kazakhstan, 43, Dostyk ave.,Office 414, Dostyk Business Centre,
050010, Almaty, Republic of Kazakhstan
North America
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +1-800-255-4101, +1-714-632-0882
• Fax: +1-714-632-0858
• Web Site: www.us.zyxel.com
• FTP Site: ftp.us.zyxel.com
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications Inc., 1130 N. Miller St., Anaheim, CA 92806-
2001, U.S.A.
Norway
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +47-22-80-61-80
• Fax: +47-22-80-61-81
• Web Site: www.zyxel.no
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications A/S, Nils Hansens vei 13, 0667 Oslo, Norway
Poland
• E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +48 (22) 333 8250
• Fax: +48 (22) 333 8251
• Web Site: www.pl.zyxel.com
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications, ul. Okrzei 1A, 03-715 Warszawa, Poland
Russia
• Support: http://zyxel.ru/support
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +7-095-542-89-29
• Fax: +7-095-542-89-25
• Web Site: www.zyxel.ru
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Russia, Ostrovityanova 37a Str., Moscow, 117279, Russia
Spain
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +34-902-195-420
• Fax: +34-913-005-345
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
301
Appendix C Customer Support
• Web Site: www.zyxel.es
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications, Arte, 21 5ª planta, 28033 Madrid, Spain
Sweden
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +46-31-744-7700
• Fax: +46-31-744-7701
• Web Site: www.zyxel.se
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications A/S, Sjöporten 4, 41764 Göteborg, Sweden
Ukraine
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +380-44-247-69-78
• Fax: +380-44-494-49-32
• Web Site: www.ua.zyxel.com
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Ukraine, 13, Pimonenko Str., Kiev, 04050, Ukraine
United Kingdom
• Support E-mail: [email protected]
• Sales E-mail: [email protected]
• Telephone: +44-1344 303044, 08707 555779 (UK only)
• Fax: +44-1344 303034
• Web Site: www.zyxel.co.uk
• FTP Site: ftp.zyxel.co.uk
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications UK, Ltd.,11 The Courtyard, Eastern Road,
Bracknell, Berkshire, RG12 2XB, United Kingdom (UK)
“+” is the (prefix) number you dial to make an international telephone call.
302
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Numerics
802.1P priority
A
Access control
SNMP
access control login account
remote management
service
activate IEEE 802.1x
Address Resolution Protocol See ARP
alarm profile
alternative subnet mask notation
application
curbside
ARP, how it works
automatic VLAN registration
VLAN automatic registration
B backup configuration
bandwidth control
Basic setting
Bridge Protocol Data Unit See BPDU
broadcast
broadcast storm control
C
Canonical Format Indicator See CFI
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Index
Index
certifications
notices
viewing
CFI
Change password
CI Commands
Ethernet type
example
packet format
access
access priority
change password
login
login password
logout
management interface
CLI Command
Configure tagged VLAN example
cluster management
access password
cluster member
cluster member firmware upgrade
clustering candidate
manager
member
memeber web configurator screen
network example
setup
specification
status
switch models
warning icon
cluster manager
cluster member
clustering
Command
Forwarding Process Example
Summary
Syntax conventions
exit
command interface
Command Line Interface See CLI
commands modes summary
configuration backup
303
Index
Configuration file
Restore
configuration restore
configure port authentication
configuring STP
connection test
Console port
Settings
console port
initial screen
contact information
copyright
CPU management port
CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check)
create login account
customer support
D
destination lookup failure See DLF
device MAC address
DHCP
option 82
relay agent information
diagnostic
ping
system log
test
Differentiated Services See DiffServ
DiffServ
activate
DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p mapping
disclaimer
double-tagged frame
double-tagged frame format
DS
DSCP-to-IEEE802.1p mapping
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP
304
E egress port
Ethernet broadcast address
Ethernet port connection
Ethernet port detail
Ethernet ports
Default settings
extended authentication protocol
F fast mode
FCC interference statement
File Transfer Protocol See FTP
filename convention
Filtering
filtering
database
IGMP
Firmware
firmware
firmware upgrade
firmware version
fixed rate
Flow control
Back pressure
IEEE802.3x
front panel
FTP
command example
procedure
restriction
G
GARP
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol See GARP
join timer
leave all timer
leave timer
timer
garp status
GARP timer
general setup
Getting help
Gigabit Ethernet ports
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Index
GVRP
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol See GVRP
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol)
gvrp disable
gvrp enable
gvrp status
H hardware connection
hardware installation
rack mount
hardware monitor
hop count
HTTP
example
HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket
I
IANA
IEEE 802.1p
IEEE 802.1Q
IEEE 802.1x
Note
IGMP
snooping
IGMP filtering
profile
IGMP snooping
In
ingress check
ingress port
interleave delay
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
See IANA
Internet Group Multicast Protocol See IGMP
IP setup
L
link aggregation ID
note
server
system priority
timeout
latency mode
fast
interleave delay
LED
LEDs
limit MAC address learning
Link Aggregate Control Protocol See LACP
link aggregation
ID
note
server
timeout
load factory defaults
Lockout
log
logical link
Login
Password
login
Login account administrator
login account
account type
non-administrator
number of
login precedence
logout
M
MAC address aging time
MAC address filter
MAC address forwarding decision
MAC address learning
MAC table
disaply
sort
maintenance
backup configuration
firmware upgrade
load factory defaults
restore configuration
managament IP address
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
305
Index management interface
CLI
managing the device good habits
using Telnet. See command interface.
using the command interface. See command interface.
using the web configurator. See web configurator.
supported
MIBs
Mini GBIC ports
Connection speed
Connector type
Transceiver installation
Transceiver removal
mini-GBIC port connection
monitor port
MSA (MultiSource Agreement)
MTU
MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit)
Multicast
multicast
address
setup
multicast group
multicast VLAN
multiple login
Multiple Tenant Unit See also MTU
MVR configuration
configuration example
group configuration
how it works
mode
Multicast VLAN Registration See MVR network example
port
N
NAT
Network Management System (NMS)
NTP
O
Operating Temperature
Operational Humidity
P
Password
PHB
physical queue
ping
policy
example
POP3
port and MVR
Port authentication
RADIUS server
port authentication
Port Based VLAN Type
port connection
port isolation
Port Mirroring
Port mirroring
port redundancy
port security
limit MAC address learning
port setup
Port speed/duplex
port status
port test
Port VID
Default for all ports
port VID
port VLAN trunking
port-based VLAN
port isolation
setting wizard
POTS port connection
Power Spectral Density See PSD
priority
priority level
priority queue assignment
product registration
profile alarm
VDSL line
PSD
306
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
PVID
Q
QoS
Queuing
Queuing algorithm
queuing algorithm select
Queuing method
R rack mouting
requirement
Radio Frequency Interference See RFI
RADIUS server
Advantages
Network example
Settings
setup
shared secret
UDP port
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See RSTP
rate adaption
fixed rate
rate adaptive decrease mode
rate adaptive decrease mode
reauthentication
reboot system
registration product
related documentation
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service See
remote management
service
Reset
reset configuration
reset to the factory defaults
restart system
Restore configuration
restore configuration
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Index
RFC 3046
RFC 3164
RFI
route cost
Runt
S
Safety
safety warnings
select VLAN type
service access control
service port
Service Provider’s Network See SPN
SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable)
shared secret
Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP
agent
command
community
manager
network component
object variable
Management Information Base See MIB
supported MIB
trap
trap destination
SNR
SP TPID
Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier See SP
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
Spanning Tree Protocol See STP
SPN
how it works
implimentation
login example
requirement
standard port
307
Index version supported
Standards
standby port
stastic VLAN port setup
static MAC address
Static MAC forwarding
static MAC forwarding
static route
destination IP address
metric
acceptable frame type
Control
create
ingress check
port isolation
status
tagging
Status
LED
VLAN
status
Ethernet port detail
port
STP
VLAN port detail
Bridge ID
bridge priority
designated bridge
forwarding delay
Hello BPDU
hello time
How it works
max age
path cost
port priority
root path cost
root port
setup
status
Terminology
terminology
Strict Priority Queuing See SPQ
subnet
subnet mask
subnetting
Switch lockout
Switch reset
switch setup
syntax conventions
sys Commands
308 examples
sys log disp
syslog
log type
protocol
server setup
setup
severity level
system date
system information
system log
system name
system reboot
system time
System up time
T
Tag Control Information See TCI
Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID
TCP/UDP protocol port numbers
Telco-50 Connector Pin Assignments
Telnet
time server
time zone
TPID
trademarks
Transceiver
Installation
Removal
trap
destination
trunk group
trunking
note
U
UPBO
Upstream Power Back Off See UPBO
USER Telco-50 Connectors
UTC (Universal Time Coordinated)
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
V
VDSL port connection
VDSL port detail
ventilation
view log
Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN
VLA stacking frame format
VLAN
acceptable frame type
double-tagged frame
ingress check
Introduction
Number of VLANs
port isolation
port trunking
port-based
select type
stacking
Status
tage format
tagging
Trunking
Type
VLAN ID
VLAN profile
VLAN stacking
port role
VLAN tag
VLAN trunking
vlan1q port accept
vlan1q port gvrp
vlan1q svlan active
vlan1q svlan delentry
vlan1q svlan inactive
vlan1q svlan list
vlan1q svlan setentry
W warranty
note
Web configuration
Screen summary
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
Web configurator
Getting help
Home
Login
Logout
Navigation panel
web configurator
Weighted Fair Scheduling See WFS
Z
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System)
Index
309
Index
310
VES-1616F-3x Series User’s Guide
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Key Features
- Supports VDSL2 and ADSL2+ standards, providing high-speed broadband access
- Delivers up to 100Mbps downstream and 40Mbps upstream data rates
- Equipped with 16 VDSL2 ports and 4 Gigabit Ethernet ports for flexible connectivity
- Supports VLAN tagging for traffic segregation and security
- Provides advanced QoS features for prioritizing traffic and optimizing network performance
- Offers TR-069 remote management for easy configuration and troubleshooting
- Compact and fanless design for quiet operation in various environments
- Ideal for small businesses, home offices, and residential users seeking a high-performance networking solution
Related manuals
Frequently Answers and Questions
What is the maximum data rate supported by the VES-1616F-3X?
How many VDSL2 ports does the VES-1616F-3X have?
Does the VES-1616F-3X support VLAN tagging?
What type of management interface does the VES-1616F-3X offer?
Is the VES-1616F-3X suitable for home use?
advertisement